1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \use_dash_ligatures false
74 \default_output_format pdf2
76 \bibtex_command bibtex
77 \index_command default
81 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
82 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
86 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
87 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
88 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
93 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
94 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
97 \use_package amsmath 1
98 \use_package amssymb 1
101 \use_package mathdots 1
102 \use_package mathtools 1
103 \use_package mhchem 1
104 \use_package stackrel 1
105 \use_package stmaryrd 1
106 \use_package undertilde 1
108 \cite_engine_type default
112 \paperorientation portrait
117 \notefontcolor #0000ff
134 \paragraph_separation skip
137 \math_numbering_side default
138 \quotes_style english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes false
144 \output_changes false
158 by the \SpecialChar LyX
163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
165 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
166 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
167 Documentation mailing list:
168 \begin_inset CommandInset href
170 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
182 \begin_inset Newline newline
186 \begin_inset Newline newline
190 \begin_inset Note Note
193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
194 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
195 \begin_inset Newline newline
200 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
208 \begin_layout Standard
209 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
210 LatexCommand tableofcontents
217 \begin_layout Chapter
221 \begin_layout Section
222 What is \SpecialChar LyX
226 \begin_layout Standard
228 is a document preparation system.
229 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
230 scripts, publishable books, business
231 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
232 It is unlike most other
233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
240 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
242 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
255 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
258 pt type, left justified, 5
259 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
268 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
272 \begin_layout Standard
273 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
278 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
282 \begin_layout Standard
287 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
288 's philosophy: most importantly,
289 the format of all of the manuals.
290 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
291 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
297 manual describes that, too.
300 \begin_layout Section
305 \begin_layout Standard
306 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
307 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
309 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
310 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
314 \begin_layout Standard
315 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
316 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
317 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
319 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
320 only a vertical scrollbar.
321 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
322 The first case is large images.
323 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
324 image and use the option
335 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
338 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
339 this doesn't work for equations yet.
342 \begin_layout Standard
343 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
344 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
352 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
359 \begin_layout Section
363 \begin_layout Standard
364 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
366 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
368 Just select the manual you want to read from the
375 \begin_layout Section
376 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
378 \begin_inset CommandInset label
380 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
387 \begin_layout Standard
388 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
389 can be configured via the menu
391 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
395 \begin_inset Index idx
398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
405 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
407 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
408 packages are available.
409 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
411 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
413 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
414 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
418 \begin_inset space \space{}
421 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
422 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
424 To force \SpecialChar LyX
425 to re-inspect your system, you should use
427 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
431 \begin_inset Index idx
434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
435 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
441 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
442 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
445 \begin_layout Section
448 \begin_inset CommandInset label
450 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
457 \begin_layout Standard
458 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
459 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
460 installed, but you will not be
461 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
462 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
463 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
464 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
465 document can always be output as plain text
469 \begin_layout Standard
470 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
471 or DocBook classes or packages.
472 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
473 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
476 \begin_layout Standard
477 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
478 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
479 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
482 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
490 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
491 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
494 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
498 \begin_inset Index idx
501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
502 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
510 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
517 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
521 \begin_layout Chapter
522 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
526 \begin_layout Section
527 Basic File Operations
528 \begin_inset Index idx
531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
540 \begin_layout Standard
545 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
546 in addition to some more advanced operations:
549 \begin_layout Itemize
571 \begin_layout Itemize
587 arg "buffer-new-template"
593 \begin_layout Itemize
615 \begin_layout Itemize
625 \begin_layout Itemize
639 \begin_layout Itemize
661 \begin_layout Itemize
673 arg "buffer-write-as"
679 \begin_layout Itemize
693 \begin_layout Itemize
707 \begin_layout Standard
708 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
709 a few minor differences.
712 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
723 command lists the available templates.
724 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
725 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
726 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
734 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
741 \begin_layout Standard
742 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
759 \begin_inset Quotes eld
763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
774 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
775 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
776 is just that — a big, blank space.
784 \begin_layout Standard
805 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
810 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
813 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
831 will reload the document from disk.
832 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
833 and want to restore it to the last save.
842 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
843 them as your changes.
846 \begin_layout Section
847 Basic Editing Features
848 \begin_inset Index idx
851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
858 \begin_inset CommandInset label
860 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
867 \begin_layout Standard
868 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
869 can perform cut and paste operations
870 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
871 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
872 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
873 editing features and how to access
875 We will start with cut and paste.
878 \begin_layout Standard
879 As you might expect, the
883 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
884 various other editing features.
885 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
889 \begin_layout Itemize
895 \begin_inset Index idx
898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
927 \begin_layout Itemize
933 \begin_inset Index idx
936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
965 \begin_layout Itemize
971 \begin_inset Index idx
974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
999 \begin_layout Itemize
1003 \begin_inset space ~
1009 \begin_layout Itemize
1013 \begin_inset space ~
1019 \begin_layout Itemize
1023 \begin_inset space ~
1027 \begin_inset space ~
1033 \begin_inset Index idx
1036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1045 \begin_inset Index idx
1048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1063 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1073 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1079 \begin_layout Standard
1080 The first three are self-explanatory.
1081 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1082 and other programs by
1103 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1104 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1109 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1110 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1111 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1112 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1113 into individual cells.
1117 \begin_inset space ~
1122 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1123 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1127 \begin_layout Standard
1131 \begin_inset space ~
1136 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1138 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1140 \begin_inset space ~
1147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1153 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1154 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1155 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1157 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1161 \begin_inset space \space{}
1164 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1165 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1168 \begin_inset space ~
1171 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1173 \begin_inset space ~
1177 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1181 \begin_inset space ~
1190 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1191 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1193 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1197 \begin_inset space ~
1202 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1203 start a new paragraph.
1204 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1205 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1210 \begin_inset space ~
1213 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1215 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1219 \begin_inset space ~
1227 \begin_inset space ~
1230 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1233 paste from the primary selection.
1234 This is normally the currently selected text.
1237 \begin_layout Standard
1240 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1242 \begin_inset space ~
1246 \begin_inset space ~
1254 \begin_inset space ~
1258 \begin_inset space ~
1264 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1270 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1273 \begin_inset space ~
1282 \begin_inset space ~
1287 button to skip the current word.
1291 \begin_inset space ~
1296 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1300 \begin_inset space ~
1305 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1307 If the toggle is set, searching for
1308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1319 will not match the word
1320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1334 Match whole words only
1336 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1337 to only find complete words, e.
1338 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1367 offers also an advanced
1370 \begin_inset space ~
1374 \begin_inset space ~
1379 feature that is described in section
1380 \begin_inset space ~
1384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1386 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1393 \begin_layout Standard
1394 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1395 \begin_inset space \space{}
1399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1407 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1409 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1414 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1421 \begin_layout Standard
1425 arg "inset-select-all"
1428 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1429 When the cursor is inside an inset
1432 arg "inset-select-all"
1435 selects the content of the inset.
1439 arg "inset-select-all"
1442 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1447 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1450 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1454 \begin_layout Section
1456 \begin_inset Index idx
1459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1466 \begin_inset Index idx
1469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1476 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1478 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1485 \begin_layout Standard
1486 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1488 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1491 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1494 or the toolbar button
1500 to undo some mistake.
1501 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1503 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1506 or the toolbar button
1513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1520 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1521 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1524 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1527 \begin_layout Standard
1528 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1537 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1538 This is a consequence of the 100
1539 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1542 step undo limit mentioned above.
1545 \begin_layout Standard
1554 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1556 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1560 \begin_layout Section
1562 \begin_inset Index idx
1565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1574 \begin_layout Standard
1575 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1578 \begin_layout Enumerate
1583 \begin_layout Itemize
1588 once anywhere in the edit window.
1589 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1593 \begin_layout Enumerate
1598 \begin_layout Itemize
1605 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1608 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1611 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1612 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1615 \begin_layout Itemize
1616 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1619 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1626 \begin_layout Enumerate
1627 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1631 \begin_layout Standard
1632 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1633 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1637 \begin_layout Section
1639 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1641 name "sec:Navigating"
1646 \begin_inset Index idx
1649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1658 \begin_layout Standard
1660 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1663 \begin_layout Itemize
1668 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1669 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1672 \begin_layout Itemize
1673 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1675 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1677 \begin_inset space ~
1682 or by the toolbar button
1685 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1691 \begin_layout Itemize
1692 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1694 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1697 and use the same menu to return to them.
1698 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1701 \begin_layout Standard
1705 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1710 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1711 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1713 \begin_inset space ~
1718 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1719 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1720 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1721 your last editing position.
1724 \begin_layout Standard
1729 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1733 \begin_layout Subsection
1735 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1737 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1742 \begin_inset Index idx
1745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1746 Navigating ! Outline
1752 \begin_inset Index idx
1755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1764 \begin_layout Standard
1765 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1766 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1767 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1769 \begin_inset space ~
1773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1775 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1779 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1780 \begin_inset space ~
1784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1786 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1791 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1795 \begin_layout Standard
1796 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1797 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1798 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1799 dialog and to modify the citation.
1802 \begin_layout Standard
1807 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1808 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1810 Labels and References
1812 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1821 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1824 \begin_layout Standard
1825 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1826 you further to control the display.
1831 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1832 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1838 option keeps it in the current view state.
1839 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1840 \begin_inset space ~
1843 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1844 \begin_inset space ~
1847 3, the subsections of sections
1848 \begin_inset space ~
1851 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1856 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1857 \begin_inset space ~
1861 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1871 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1874 \begin_layout Standard
1881 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1882 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1896 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1897 So, for example, you can move section
1898 \begin_inset space ~
1902 \begin_inset space ~
1905 2.4 or after section
1906 \begin_inset space ~
1911 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1924 (or the corresponding key bindings
1932 ) you can change the level of sections.
1933 So you can for example make section
1934 \begin_inset space ~
1938 \begin_inset space ~
1942 \begin_inset space ~
1948 \begin_layout Standard
1949 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1950 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1953 \begin_layout Subsection
1954 Horizontal Scrolling
1955 \begin_inset Index idx
1958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1959 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1967 \begin_layout Standard
1969 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1971 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1975 \begin_inset space \space{}
1979 \begin_inset space ~
1982 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1983 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1984 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1988 \begin_layout Standard
1989 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1993 \begin_layout Itemize
1995 is used on a small tablet computer
1998 \begin_layout Itemize
1999 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2011 \begin_inset space ~
2024 \begin_layout Itemize
2025 Math constructs with long command names
2028 \begin_layout Standard
2029 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2030 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2032 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2033 windows so that table
2034 \begin_inset space ~
2038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2040 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2045 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2047 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2048 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2051 \begin_layout Standard
2052 \begin_inset Float table
2058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2059 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2062 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2064 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2068 Horizontal scrolling test.
2076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2078 \begin_inset Tabular
2079 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2080 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2081 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2082 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2125 \begin_layout Section
2126 Input/Word Completion
2127 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2129 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2134 \begin_inset Index idx
2137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2144 \begin_inset Index idx
2147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2178 \begin_layout Standard
2180 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2182 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2183 is used to propose completions.
2186 \begin_layout Standard
2187 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2190 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2195 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2202 \begin_inset space ~
2206 \begin_inset space ~
2211 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2215 \begin_inset space ~
2220 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2221 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2225 \begin_inset space ~
2231 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2232 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2233 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2234 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2237 \begin_layout Standard
2239 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2240 completions available.
2245 key to accept a proposed completion.
2246 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2247 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2248 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2255 \begin_layout Standard
2256 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2257 ing options for text.
2258 The special math option
2262 enables characters to be composed.
2263 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2264 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2267 , you can then input the characters
2268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2279 to a formula to get it.
2280 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2281 of the math toolbar.
2282 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2286 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2287 's installation folder.
2288 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2297 \begin_layout Section
2299 \begin_inset Index idx
2302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2309 \begin_inset Index idx
2312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2341 \begin_inset Index idx
2344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2375 \begin_layout Standard
2376 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2390 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2393 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2397 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2398 \begin_inset space ~
2402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2404 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2411 \begin_layout Standard
2415 \begin_inset space ~
2423 \begin_inset space ~
2444 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2448 \begin_layout Labeling
2449 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2453 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2454 LatexCommand nomenclature
2456 description "Tabulator key"
2463 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2465 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2466 \begin_inset space ~
2470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2472 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2477 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2479 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2483 , especially section
2484 \begin_inset space ~
2488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2490 reference "subsec:Lists"
2496 If you are still confused, look in the
2501 \begin_inset Newline newline
2509 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2510 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2514 \begin_layout Labeling
2515 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2519 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2520 LatexCommand nomenclature
2522 description "Escape key"
2530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2537 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2538 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2541 \begin_layout Labeling
2542 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2548 \begin_inset space ~
2552 \begin_inset space ~
2559 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2560 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2564 \begin_layout Standard
2565 There are three modifier keys:
2568 \begin_layout Labeling
2569 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2587 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2588 LatexCommand nomenclature
2590 description "Control key"
2595 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2596 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2600 \begin_layout Itemize
2609 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2612 \begin_layout Itemize
2621 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2624 \begin_layout Itemize
2633 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2637 \begin_layout Labeling
2638 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2656 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2657 LatexCommand nomenclature
2659 description "Shift key"
2664 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2665 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2668 \begin_layout Labeling
2669 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2683 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2687 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2688 LatexCommand nomenclature
2690 description "Alt or Meta key"
2695 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2696 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2697 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2703 \begin_inset Newline newline
2706 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2708 menu accelerator keys
2711 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2712 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2716 \begin_layout Standard
2717 For example, the sequence
2718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2724 \begin_inset space ~
2728 \begin_inset space ~
2734 \begin_inset space ~
2742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2761 \begin_inset space ~
2767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2777 \begin_layout Standard
2782 manual lists all other things bound to the
2790 \begin_layout Standard
2791 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2793 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2794 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2795 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2796 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2797 The \SpecialChar LyX
2798 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2799 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2800 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2802 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2818 followed by a capital
2825 \begin_layout Chapter
2828 \begin_inset Index idx
2831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2841 \begin_layout Section
2843 \begin_inset Index idx
2846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2855 \begin_layout Subsection
2859 \begin_layout Standard
2860 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2861 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2862 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2863 numbering schemes, and so on.
2864 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2865 and format the title of your document differently.
2868 \begin_layout Standard
2873 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2874 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2875 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2876 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2877 picks one for you by default.
2878 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2881 \begin_layout Subsection
2883 \begin_inset Index idx
2886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2893 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2895 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2902 \begin_layout Standard
2903 You can select a class using the
2905 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2906 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2910 \begin_inset Index idx
2913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2920 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2924 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2928 \begin_layout Standard
2929 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2934 \begin_layout Description
2935 Article for basic articles
2938 \begin_layout Description
2939 Report for basic reports
2942 \begin_layout Description
2943 Book for writing a book
2946 \begin_layout Description
2947 Letter for US-style letters
2950 \begin_layout Standard
2951 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2952 only uses if you have installed
2953 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2954 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2955 distributions will include
2957 Here are some of the classes.
2958 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2960 Special Document Classes
2969 \begin_layout Description
2970 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2973 \begin_layout Description
2974 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2978 \begin_layout Description
2979 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2983 \begin_layout Description
2984 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2985 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2986 There are three article layouts available.
2987 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2988 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2989 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2990 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2995 sequential numbering
2996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2999 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3000 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3001 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3002 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3005 \begin_layout Description
3006 Beamer Layout for presentations
3009 \begin_layout Description
3010 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3011 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3012 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3013 with \SpecialChar LyX
3017 \begin_layout Description
3018 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3021 \begin_layout Description
3023 \begin_inset space ~
3026 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3029 \begin_layout Description
3030 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3033 \begin_layout Description
3034 Foils Used to make transparencies
3037 \begin_layout Description
3038 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3039 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3040 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3041 with \SpecialChar LyX
3045 \begin_layout Description
3046 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3047 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3050 \begin_layout Description
3051 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3054 \begin_layout Description
3055 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3058 \begin_layout Description
3059 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3060 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3061 (Is used by this document.)
3064 \begin_layout Description
3065 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3068 \begin_layout Description
3069 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3072 \begin_layout Description
3077 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3078 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3080 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3084 \begin_layout Description
3085 Slides Used to make transparencies
3088 \begin_layout Description
3090 \begin_inset space ~
3093 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3094 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3097 \begin_layout Description
3098 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3101 \begin_layout Standard
3102 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3104 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3106 Special Document Classes
3113 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3114 of the document classes.
3117 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3121 \begin_layout Standard
3122 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3124 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3125 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3127 \begin_inset Index idx
3130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3147 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3148 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3150 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3153 \begin_layout Standard
3156 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3161 , are highly specialized.
3163 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3164 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3165 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3166 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3167 by some document class.
3168 There are just too many of them.
3169 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3172 \begin_layout Standard
3173 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3181 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3182 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3183 document class for a new file.
3185 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3188 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3195 manual for information on how to install them.
3196 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3202 \begin_layout Standard
3203 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3204 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3205 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3206 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3207 class files to be used for dissertation
3208 s submitted to those universities.
3209 The \SpecialChar LyX
3210 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3212 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3216 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3222 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3225 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3227 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3229 name "subsec:Modules"
3234 \begin_inset Index idx
3237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3246 \begin_layout Standard
3247 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3248 chosen document class.
3249 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3250 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3257 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3261 \begin_inset Index idx
3264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3271 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3275 \begin_layout Standard
3276 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3277 packages or file format converters that are not always
3278 installed by default.
3280 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3281 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3282 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3283 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3285 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3286 file without the missing prerequisites.
3287 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3288 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3291 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3295 \begin_inset Index idx
3298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3299 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3305 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3310 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3313 \begin_layout Standard
3314 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3322 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3324 will advise you about these things.
3332 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3334 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3336 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3341 \begin_inset Index idx
3344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3345 Document ! Local Layout
3353 \begin_layout Standard
3354 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3355 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3356 : They are intended to be used in
3357 a variety of different documents.
3358 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3359 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3360 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3361 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3362 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3364 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3382 manual for information on how to use it.
3385 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3389 \begin_layout Standard
3390 Each class has a default set of options.
3391 Here's a quick table describing them:
3394 \begin_layout Standard
3395 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3401 \begin_layout Standard
3403 \begin_inset Tabular
3404 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3405 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3406 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3407 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3408 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3409 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3410 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3864 \begin_layout Standard
3865 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3871 \begin_layout Standard
3872 You're probably also wondering what
3873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3877 \begin_inset space ~
3881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3885 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3886 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3891 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3896 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3906 headings, there are also
3914 headings, and so on.
3915 We will describe these headings fully in section
3916 \begin_inset space ~
3920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3922 reference "subsec:Headings"
3929 \begin_layout Subsection
3931 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3933 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3938 \begin_inset Index idx
3941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3948 \begin_inset Index idx
3951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3960 \begin_layout Standard
3961 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3963 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3970 \begin_inset space ~
3978 \begin_inset space ~
3983 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3985 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3986 doesn't support special options you want to
3987 use for your document.
3988 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3989 -class and its options, you have to read
3993 \begin_layout Standard
3997 \begin_inset space ~
4004 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4010 \begin_inset space ~
4015 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4016 You can choose between the following five options:
4019 \begin_layout Labeling
4020 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4025 Use default page style of current class.
4028 \begin_layout Labeling
4029 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4034 No page numbers or headings.
4037 \begin_layout Labeling
4038 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4046 \begin_layout Labeling
4047 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4052 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4053 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4054 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4055 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4058 \begin_layout Labeling
4059 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4064 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4065 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4071 \begin_inset Index idx
4074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4082 How they are defined is explained in section
4083 \begin_inset space ~
4087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4089 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4096 \begin_layout Standard
4097 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4098 \begin_inset space ~
4102 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4104 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4111 \begin_layout Subsection
4112 Paper Size and Orientation
4113 \begin_inset Index idx
4116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4117 Document ! Paper size
4123 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4125 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4132 \begin_layout Standard
4133 You can find the following options in the menu
4136 \begin_inset space ~
4143 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4147 \begin_inset Index idx
4150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4159 \begin_layout Labeling
4160 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4164 \begin_inset space ~
4169 What size paper to print on.
4174 \begin_layout Itemize
4180 \begin_layout Itemize
4186 \begin_layout Itemize
4192 \begin_layout Itemize
4198 \begin_layout Itemize
4201 US letter, US legal, US executive
4204 \begin_layout Itemize
4210 \begin_layout Itemize
4217 \begin_layout Labeling
4218 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4223 To choose whether to output as
4234 \begin_layout Labeling
4235 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4239 \begin_inset space ~
4244 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4245 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4248 \begin_layout Subsection
4250 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4252 name "subsec:Margins"
4257 \begin_inset Index idx
4260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4267 \begin_inset Index idx
4270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4279 \begin_layout Standard
4280 Paper margins are set in the menu
4282 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4286 \begin_inset Index idx
4289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4298 \begin_layout Standard
4299 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4300 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4301 the paper format and the font size into account.
4304 \begin_layout Subsection
4308 \begin_layout Standard
4309 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4315 That includes the paragraph environments.
4316 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4317 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4318 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4320 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4329 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4331 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4332 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4333 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4336 \begin_layout Section
4337 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4338 \begin_inset Index idx
4341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4342 Paragraph ! Indentation
4350 \begin_layout Subsection
4352 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4354 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4361 \begin_layout Standard
4362 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4363 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4366 \begin_layout Standard
4367 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4368 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4369 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4370 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4374 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4380 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4381 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4382 language than English.
4384 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4387 \begin_layout Standard
4388 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4389 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4390 into \SpecialChar LyX
4392 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4395 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4397 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4398 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4399 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4406 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4407 goes to produce a printable file.
4412 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4414 gives you the ability globally to change
4418 these pre-coded spacings.
4419 We will explain more later.
4422 \begin_layout Subsection
4423 Paragraph Separation
4424 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4426 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4431 \begin_inset Index idx
4434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4435 Paragraph ! Separation
4443 \begin_layout Standard
4451 \begin_inset space ~
4459 \begin_inset space ~
4466 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4470 \begin_inset Index idx
4473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4479 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4482 \begin_layout Subsection
4486 \begin_layout Standard
4487 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4490 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4492 \begin_inset space ~
4497 dialog and toggle the
4500 \begin_inset space ~
4505 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4508 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4512 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4513 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4517 \begin_layout Standard
4518 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4519 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4522 \begin_layout Subsection
4524 \begin_inset Index idx
4527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4528 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4536 \begin_layout Standard
4539 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4543 \begin_inset Index idx
4546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4555 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4559 \begin_inset space ~
4568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4569 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4575 \begin_inset Index idx
4578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4585 installed to use this feature.
4590 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4592 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4594 \begin_inset space ~
4599 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4600 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4603 \begin_layout Section
4604 Paragraph Environments
4605 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4607 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4612 \begin_inset Index idx
4615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4616 Paragraph ! Environments
4622 \begin_inset Index idx
4625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4626 Paragraph environments|(
4634 \begin_layout Subsection
4638 \begin_layout Standard
4639 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4642 \begin_layout Standard
4651 } \SpecialChar ldots
4661 \begin_inset Newline newline
4664 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4666 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4667 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4668 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4677 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4680 \begin_layout Standard
4681 A paragraph environment is simply a
4682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4689 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4690 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4691 scheme, labels, and so on.
4692 Additionally, you can
4693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4700 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4701 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4702 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4703 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4705 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4707 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4710 \begin_layout Standard
4711 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4712 \begin_inset Graphics
4713 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4719 at the left end of the toolbar.
4721 will change the environment of the
4725 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4726 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4727 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4731 \begin_layout Standard
4740 create a new paragraph using the
4744 paragraph environment.
4746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4753 because if you are in one of these environments:
4756 \begin_layout Itemize
4762 \begin_layout Itemize
4768 \begin_layout Itemize
4774 \begin_layout Itemize
4780 \begin_layout Itemize
4786 \begin_layout Itemize
4792 \begin_layout Itemize
4798 \begin_layout Standard
4800 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4804 , rather than resetting it to
4809 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4810 \begin_inset space ~
4814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4816 reference "sec:Nesting"
4823 \begin_layout Subsection
4827 \begin_layout Standard
4828 The default paragraph environment is
4833 It creates a plain paragraph.
4835 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4836 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4837 this manual) are in the
4844 \begin_layout Standard
4845 You can nest a paragraph using the
4849 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4857 \begin_layout Subsection
4859 \begin_inset Index idx
4862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4871 \begin_layout Standard
4872 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4873 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4882 for thanks or contact information.
4883 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4884 places all of this on a separate page
4885 along with today's date.
4886 For other types of documents, the title
4887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4894 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4898 \begin_layout Standard
4900 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4914 Here's how you use them:
4917 \begin_layout Itemize
4918 Put the title of your document in the
4925 \begin_layout Itemize
4926 Put the author name in the
4933 \begin_layout Itemize
4934 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4935 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4941 Note that using this environment is optional.
4942 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4943 will automatically insert today's date.
4944 If you don't want a date, use the option
4946 Suppress default date on front page
4950 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4951 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4953 \begin_inset space ~
4961 \begin_layout Standard
4962 You can use footnotes to insert
4963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4970 or contact information.
4973 \begin_layout Subsection
4975 \begin_inset Index idx
4978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4985 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4987 name "subsec:Headings"
4994 \begin_layout Standard
4995 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4997 takes care of the numbering for you.
5000 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5002 \begin_inset Index idx
5005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5006 Section headings ! Numbered
5014 \begin_layout Standard
5015 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5019 \begin_layout Enumerate
5025 \begin_layout Enumerate
5031 \begin_layout Enumerate
5037 \begin_layout Enumerate
5043 \begin_layout Enumerate
5049 \begin_layout Enumerate
5055 \begin_layout Enumerate
5061 \begin_layout Standard
5063 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5064 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5065 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5068 \begin_layout Standard
5069 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5070 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5071 You group the book into chapters.
5073 does a similar grouping:
5076 \begin_layout Itemize
5081 is divided into either
5092 \begin_layout Itemize
5104 \begin_layout Itemize
5116 \begin_layout Itemize
5128 \begin_layout Itemize
5140 \begin_layout Itemize
5152 \begin_layout Standard
5153 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5161 Not all document types use the
5165 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5170 is the top-level heading.
5178 \begin_layout Standard
5183 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5184 labels it with its number,
5185 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5187 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5199 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5201 \begin_inset Index idx
5204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5205 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5213 \begin_layout Standard
5214 The unnumbered section headings have a
5215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5222 at the end of their name.
5223 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5224 the table of contents, see section
5225 \begin_inset space ~
5229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5238 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5239 Changing the Numbering
5240 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5242 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5249 \begin_layout Standard
5250 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5251 in the Table of Contents.
5252 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5254 Just as certain classes start with
5268 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5278 This is something you can change.
5281 \begin_layout Standard
5284 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5288 \begin_inset Index idx
5291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5300 \begin_inset space ~
5304 \begin_inset space ~
5309 you will see two counters.
5314 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5315 numbers a section heading.
5316 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5320 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5321 Short Titles of Headings
5322 \begin_inset Index idx
5325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5326 Section headings ! Short titles
5332 \begin_inset Argument 1
5335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5342 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5344 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5351 \begin_layout Standard
5352 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5353 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5354 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5355 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5358 \begin_layout Standard
5360 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5361 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5362 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5363 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5366 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5368 \begin_inset space ~
5374 This will insert a box labeled
5375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5379 \begin_inset space ~
5383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5386 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5387 This also works for captions inside floats.
5388 There can only be one short title per title.
5391 \begin_layout Standard
5392 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5395 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5399 \begin_layout Standard
5400 The following information applies to all section headings:
5403 \begin_layout Itemize
5404 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5407 \begin_layout Itemize
5408 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5411 \begin_layout Itemize
5412 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5415 \begin_layout Itemize
5416 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5419 \begin_layout Subsection
5423 \begin_layout Standard
5425 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5439 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5440 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5441 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5442 the text they contain.
5443 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5451 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5454 \begin_layout Standard
5455 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5464 when you start a new paragraph.
5465 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5469 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5470 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5471 have to change back to the
5475 environment yourself.
5478 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5480 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5487 \begin_inset Index idx
5490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5499 \begin_layout Standard
5500 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5501 time for the differences.
5510 are identical except for one difference:
5514 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5523 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5526 \begin_layout Standard
5527 Here's an example of the
5540 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5542 See – no indentation!
5546 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5547 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5548 the other paragraph.
5551 \begin_layout Standard
5552 Here's another example, this time in the
5559 \begin_layout Quotation
5565 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5566 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5567 the first line, then
5571 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5575 you were quoting other text.
5578 \begin_layout Quotation
5579 Here's a new paragraph.
5580 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5581 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5584 \begin_layout Standard
5585 As the examples show,
5589 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5590 They should put quotes in the
5595 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5599 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5602 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5604 \begin_inset Index idx
5607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5614 \begin_inset Index idx
5617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5624 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5633 \begin_layout Standard
5638 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5644 \begin_inset Newline newline
5647 Which I did not rehearse!
5651 It could be much worse.
5652 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5654 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5655 indented a bit more than the first.
5656 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5662 \begin_inset Newline newline
5665 And make things look fine
5666 \begin_inset Newline newline
5672 arg "newline-insert newline"
5678 \begin_layout Standard
5683 does not indent both margins.
5684 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5685 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5688 arg "newline-insert newline"
5694 \begin_layout Subsection
5696 \begin_inset Index idx
5699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5706 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5715 \begin_layout Standard
5717 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5727 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5728 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5737 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5738 lets you provide your own label.
5739 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5740 describing some general features of all four of them.
5743 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5747 \begin_layout Standard
5748 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5750 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5751 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5760 reset the environment to
5764 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5765 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5766 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5770 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5774 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5781 \begin_layout Standard
5782 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5783 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5784 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5786 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5787 you read all of section
5788 \begin_inset space ~
5792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5794 reference "sec:Nesting"
5801 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5803 \begin_inset Index idx
5806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5813 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5822 \begin_layout Standard
5823 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5827 paragraph environment.
5828 It has the following properties:
5831 \begin_layout Itemize
5832 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5836 \begin_layout Itemize
5838 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5841 \begin_layout Itemize
5842 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5846 \begin_layout Itemize
5847 The items can have any length.
5849 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5850 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5857 \begin_layout Itemize
5862 environment inside another
5866 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5870 \begin_layout Itemize
5871 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5874 \begin_layout Itemize
5876 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5879 \begin_layout Itemize
5881 \begin_inset space ~
5885 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5887 reference "sec:Nesting"
5891 for a full explanation of nesting.
5895 \begin_layout Standard
5896 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5905 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5908 \begin_layout Standard
5909 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5910 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5913 \begin_layout Itemize
5914 The label for the first level
5918 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5922 \begin_layout Itemize
5923 The label for the second level is a dash.
5927 \begin_layout Itemize
5928 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5932 \begin_layout Itemize
5933 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5937 \begin_layout Itemize
5938 Back out to the third level.
5942 \begin_layout Itemize
5943 Back to the second level.
5947 \begin_layout Itemize
5948 Back to the outermost level.
5951 \begin_layout Standard
5952 These are the default labels for an
5957 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5959 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5962 dialog in the submenu
5967 \begin_inset Index idx
5970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5976 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5980 \begin_layout Standard
5981 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5982 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5984 \begin_inset space ~
5988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5990 reference "sec:Nesting"
5997 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5999 \begin_inset Index idx
6002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6009 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6011 name "sec:Enumerate"
6018 \begin_layout Standard
6023 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6024 It has these properties:
6027 \begin_layout Enumerate
6028 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6032 \begin_layout Enumerate
6033 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6037 \begin_layout Enumerate
6039 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6042 \begin_layout Enumerate
6047 environment resets the counter to one.
6050 \begin_layout Enumerate
6063 \begin_layout Enumerate
6064 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6065 Items can have any length.
6068 \begin_layout Enumerate
6069 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6072 \begin_layout Enumerate
6073 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6076 \begin_layout Enumerate
6077 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6081 \begin_layout Standard
6090 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6092 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6093 labels the four different levels in an
6100 \begin_layout Enumerate
6101 The first level of an
6105 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6109 \begin_layout Enumerate
6110 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6114 \begin_layout Enumerate
6115 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6119 \begin_layout Enumerate
6120 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6123 \begin_layout Enumerate
6124 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6129 \begin_layout Enumerate
6130 Back to the third level
6134 \begin_layout Enumerate
6135 Back to the second level.
6139 \begin_layout Enumerate
6140 Back to the outermost level.
6143 \begin_layout Standard
6144 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6148 environment, see section
6149 \begin_inset space ~
6153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6155 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6160 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6164 \begin_layout Standard
6165 There is more to nesting
6169 environments than we've stated here.
6170 You should read section
6171 \begin_inset space ~
6175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6177 reference "sec:Nesting"
6181 to learn more about nesting.
6184 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6186 \begin_inset Index idx
6189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6198 \begin_layout Standard
6199 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6203 list has no fixed label.
6204 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6213 of the first line as the label.
6217 \begin_layout Description
6218 Example: This is an example of the
6225 \begin_layout Standard
6227 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6231 \begin_layout Standard
6233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6240 it is meant that the first usage of the
6244 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6246 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6254 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6259 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6260 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6262 \begin_inset space ~
6268 \begin_inset space ~
6272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6274 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6278 for more information.) Here is an example:
6281 \begin_layout Description
6283 \begin_inset space ~
6286 Example: This one shows how to use a
6289 \begin_inset space ~
6301 \begin_layout Description
6302 Usage: You should use the
6306 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6307 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6309 It's not a good idea to use a
6313 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6314 You're better off using
6326 paragraphs into them.
6329 \begin_layout Description
6330 Nesting: You can nest
6334 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6338 \begin_layout Standard
6339 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6340 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6341 them from the first line.
6344 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6346 \begin_inset Index idx
6349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6358 \begin_layout Standard
6363 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6364 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6368 \begin_layout Standard
6377 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6379 Here are its properties:
6382 \begin_layout Labeling
6383 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6385 \begin_inset space ~
6388 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6397 of each line as the item label.
6402 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6403 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6404 space as described above.
6407 \begin_layout Labeling
6408 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6409 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6410 uses different margins for the item label and the
6411 body of the item text.
6412 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6413 label width plus a little extra space.
6417 \begin_layout Labeling
6418 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6420 \begin_inset space ~
6423 width \SpecialChar LyX
6424 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6425 If the label width is larger, the label
6426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6433 into the first line.
6434 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6435 margin of the rest of the item text.
6438 \begin_layout Labeling
6439 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6441 \begin_inset space ~
6444 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6449 environment has the same left margin.
6450 \begin_inset Newline newline
6453 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6456 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6458 \begin_inset space ~
6463 dialog (toolbar button
6466 arg "layout-paragraph"
6473 \begin_inset space ~
6478 determines the default label width.
6479 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6488 multiple times instead.
6489 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6499 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6502 \begin_inset space ~
6507 every time you alter a label in a
6512 \begin_inset Newline newline
6515 The predefined default width is the length of
6516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6524 \begin_inset space ~
6530 \begin_layout Standard
6535 list the same way as the
6539 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6545 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6549 \begin_layout Standard
6554 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6555 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6557 \begin_inset space ~
6561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6563 reference "sec:Nesting"
6567 to learn about nesting.
6570 \begin_layout Standard
6571 There is yet another feature of the
6575 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6576 left-justifies the item labels by
6578 You can use additional
6582 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6583 justifies the item label.
6588 are documented in section
6589 \begin_inset space ~
6593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6595 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6600 Here are some examples:
6603 \begin_layout Labeling
6604 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6605 Left The default for
6612 \begin_layout Labeling
6613 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6614 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6621 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6624 \begin_layout Labeling
6625 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6626 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6630 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6637 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6640 \begin_layout Subsection
6642 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6644 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6649 \begin_inset Index idx
6652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6661 \begin_layout Standard
6662 The features described in this section require that the module
6664 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6666 is loaded in the document settings.
6667 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6673 \begin_inset Index idx
6676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6686 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6687 Custom Enumerate Lists
6688 \begin_inset Index idx
6691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6692 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6700 \begin_layout Standard
6702 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6705 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6708 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6709 There you add the command
6712 \begin_layout Standard
6720 \begin_layout Standard
6732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6733 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6734 Code, look at section
6735 \begin_inset space ~
6739 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6741 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6754 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6761 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6762 For capital Roman numerals replace
6774 in the command above.
6775 For Arabic numerals use
6783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6790 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6805 \begin_layout Standard
6807 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6815 You can only number 26
6816 \begin_inset space ~
6819 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6827 \begin_layout Standard
6828 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6829 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6832 \begin_layout Standard
6833 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6836 \begin_layout Enumerate
6837 \begin_inset Argument 1
6840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6866 \begin_layout Enumerate
6867 \begin_inset Argument 1
6870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6893 \begin_layout Enumerate
6898 \begin_layout Enumerate
6899 \begin_inset Argument 1
6902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6926 \begin_layout Enumerate
6927 \begin_inset Argument 1
6930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6956 \begin_layout Standard
6957 For this list these commands were used:
6960 \begin_layout Standard
6971 \begin_inset Newline newline
6979 \begin_inset Newline newline
6987 \begin_inset Newline newline
6997 \begin_layout Standard
7004 makes the label emphasized and
7013 \begin_layout Standard
7014 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7022 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7023 lists until you change the definition.
7031 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7033 \begin_inset Index idx
7036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7037 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7045 \begin_layout Standard
7046 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7049 \begin_layout Enumerate
7050 \begin_inset Argument 1
7053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7072 \begin_inset Note Note
7075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7076 goes back to default numbering
7084 \begin_layout Enumerate
7088 \begin_layout Standard
7092 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7096 \begin_layout Standard
7097 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7102 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7103 to indicate that it is a resumed
7104 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7105 , but in the output.
7108 \begin_layout Standard
7109 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7117 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7126 \begin_layout Standard
7127 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7129 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7130 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7131 of a normal enumeration.
7132 There, insert the command
7135 \begin_layout Standard
7141 \begin_layout Standard
7146 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7150 \begin_layout Enumerate
7154 \begin_layout Enumerate
7158 \begin_layout Standard
7159 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7162 \begin_layout Enumerate
7163 \begin_inset Argument 1
7166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7182 This enumeration starts at 4
7185 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7187 \begin_inset Index idx
7190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7199 \begin_layout Standard
7200 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7202 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7205 \begin_layout Itemize
7209 \begin_layout Itemize
7210 with standard spacing
7213 \begin_layout Standard
7214 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7216 Add there the command
7220 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7223 \begin_layout Itemize
7224 \begin_inset Argument 1
7227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7246 \begin_layout Itemize
7250 \begin_layout Itemize
7254 \begin_layout Standard
7255 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7262 \begin_inset Index idx
7265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7273 For more information see its documentation,
7274 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7284 \begin_layout Standard
7285 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7287 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7288 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7289 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7292 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7295 \begin_layout Enumerate
7296 \begin_inset Argument 1
7299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7307 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7320 \begin_layout Enumerate
7321 with negative indentation
7324 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7325 Further Customization
7326 \begin_inset Index idx
7329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7330 Lists ! Customization
7338 \begin_layout Standard
7339 You can also change the style of description lists.
7343 \begin_layout Standard
7349 \begin_layout Standard
7350 changes the description label font, the command
7353 \begin_layout Standard
7359 \begin_layout Standard
7360 sets the list style.
7363 \begin_layout Standard
7364 An example where the command
7367 \begin_layout Standard
7372 itshape, style=nextline
7375 \begin_layout Standard
7379 \begin_layout Description
7381 \begin_inset space ~
7385 \begin_inset Argument 1
7388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7394 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7396 itshape, style=nextline
7406 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7407 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7411 \begin_layout Description
7413 \begin_inset space ~
7416 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7417 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7418 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7421 \begin_layout Standard
7422 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7428 \begin_inset Index idx
7431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7439 For more information see its documentation
7440 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7450 \begin_layout Subsection
7452 \begin_inset Index idx
7455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7464 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7466 \begin_inset space ~
7469 Address: An Overview
7472 \begin_layout Standard
7473 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7474 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7482 \begin_inset space ~
7488 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7489 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7490 gags on the document.
7491 In contrast, you can use the
7498 \begin_inset space ~
7503 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7504 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7508 \begin_layout Standard
7509 Of course, you're not limited to using
7516 \begin_inset space ~
7525 \begin_inset space ~
7530 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7531 some European academic papers.
7534 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7536 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7538 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7545 \begin_layout Standard
7550 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7551 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7555 \begin_inset space ~
7560 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7561 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7562 Here's an example of each:
7565 \begin_layout Right Address
7567 \begin_inset Newline newline
7571 \begin_inset Newline newline
7575 \begin_inset Newline newline
7578 When is it? What is today?
7581 \begin_layout Standard
7585 \begin_inset space ~
7591 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7593 the largest block of text on a single line.
7594 Here's an example of the
7601 \begin_layout Address
7603 \begin_inset Newline newline
7606 Where do I send this
7607 \begin_inset Newline newline
7610 Your post office and country
7613 \begin_layout Standard
7614 As you can see, both
7621 \begin_inset space ~
7626 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7631 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7632 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7638 This makes sense, since
7646 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7647 Thus, you have to use
7654 arg "newline-insert newline"
7659 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7660 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7662 \begin_inset space ~
7666 \begin_inset space ~
7671 ) to start a new line in an
7678 \begin_inset space ~
7686 \begin_layout Subsection
7690 \begin_layout Standard
7691 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7692 or list of references.
7694 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7697 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7699 \begin_inset Index idx
7702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7711 \begin_layout Standard
7716 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7717 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7718 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7719 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7733 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7734 The book document classes ignores the
7738 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7742 in a letter document class.
7745 \begin_layout Standard
7750 environment does several things for you.
7751 First, it puts the centered label
7752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7760 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7762 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7763 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7764 the subsequent text.
7765 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7767 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7771 \begin_layout Standard
7772 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7776 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7777 The new paragraph will still be in the
7782 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7783 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7786 \begin_layout Standard
7787 \begin_inset Float figure
7792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7794 \begin_inset Graphics
7795 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7803 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7806 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7808 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7829 \begin_layout Standard
7830 We would love to demonstrate the
7834 environment, but since this document is in the
7835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7842 class, we can't do this.
7843 We inserted it therefore as figure
7844 \begin_inset space ~
7848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7850 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7855 If you have never heard of an
7856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7863 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7866 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7868 \begin_inset Index idx
7871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7880 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7887 \begin_layout Standard
7892 environment is used to list references.
7893 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7894 only use it at the end of the document.
7906 \begin_layout Standard
7907 When you first open a
7911 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7912 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7928 depending on the document class.
7929 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7930 Each paragraph of the
7934 environment is a bibliography entry.
7939 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7940 Each new paragraph is still in the
7947 \begin_layout Standard
7948 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7949 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7951 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7953 handling, have a look at section
7954 \begin_inset space ~
7958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7960 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7967 \begin_layout Subsection
7968 Special Environments
7971 \begin_layout Standard
7973 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7974 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7977 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7982 \begin_inset Index idx
7985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7993 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7995 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8002 \begin_layout Standard
8008 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8010 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8015 key as a fixed whitespace.
8019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8032 \begin_inset space ~
8037 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8055 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8058 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8061 arg "newline-insert newline"
8078 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8079 So, when you finish using the
8084 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8085 Also, you can nest the
8090 environment inside of others.
8093 \begin_layout Standard
8094 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8097 \begin_layout Itemize
8101 arg "newline-insert newline"
8104 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8105 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8109 \begin_inset space \space{}
8119 arg "newline-insert newline"
8125 \begin_layout Itemize
8129 arg "newline-insert newline"
8139 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8145 \begin_layout Itemize
8146 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8147 You must put at least one
8151 in any line you want blank.
8152 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8156 \begin_layout Itemize
8157 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8161 since that will insert
8166 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8169 arg "self-insert \""
8175 \begin_layout Standard
8179 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8183 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8187 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8191 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8195 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8196 printf("Hello World!
8201 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8205 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8209 \begin_layout Standard
8210 This is just the standard
8211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8222 \begin_layout Standard
8228 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8230 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8231 as if you used a typewriter.
8232 \begin_inset Index idx
8235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8236 Paragraph environments|)
8241 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8244 Program Code Listings
8249 \begin_inset space ~
8257 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8261 \begin_inset Index idx
8264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8273 \begin_layout Standard
8278 environment is similar to the
8283 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8284 computer console text.
8289 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8303 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8304 you can have empty lines.
8317 \begin_layout Itemize
8318 have a certain language and a text style
8321 \begin_layout Itemize
8322 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8323 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8324 and \SpecialChar TeX
8328 \begin_layout Standard
8329 Because of these properties
8333 works like a typewriter.
8337 \begin_layout Verbatim
8341 \begin_layout Verbatim
8344 The following 2 lines are empty:
8347 \begin_layout Verbatim
8351 \begin_layout Verbatim
8355 \begin_layout Verbatim
8356 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8361 \begin_layout Standard
8366 environment is identical to
8370 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8371 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8378 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8382 \begin_layout Section
8383 Nesting Environments
8384 \begin_inset Index idx
8387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8388 Nesting ! Environments
8394 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8403 \begin_layout Subsection
8407 \begin_layout Standard
8409 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8411 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8413 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8415 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8427 \begin_layout Enumerate
8431 \begin_layout Enumerate
8436 \begin_layout Enumerate
8440 \begin_layout Enumerate
8445 \begin_layout Enumerate
8449 \begin_layout Standard
8450 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8451 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8453 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8455 \begin_inset space ~
8459 \begin_inset space ~
8467 \begin_inset space ~
8471 \begin_inset space ~
8476 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8478 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8481 arg "depth-increment"
8487 arg "depth-decrement"
8501 arg "depth-increment"
8507 arg "depth-decrement"
8511 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8512 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8516 \begin_layout Standard
8517 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8518 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8519 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8520 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8521 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8524 \begin_layout Standard
8525 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8527 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8529 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8532 \begin_layout Subsection
8533 What You Can and Can't Nest
8536 \begin_layout Standard
8537 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8538 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8541 \begin_layout Standard
8542 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8543 than a simple yes or no.
8544 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8547 \begin_layout Itemize
8548 Completely unnestable
8551 \begin_layout Itemize
8552 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8556 \begin_layout Itemize
8557 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8561 \begin_layout Standard
8562 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8563 environments have them:
8566 \begin_layout Description
8567 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8568 Can't nest into them.
8572 \begin_layout Itemize
8578 \begin_layout Itemize
8584 \begin_layout Itemize
8590 \begin_layout Itemize
8596 \begin_layout Itemize
8603 \begin_layout Description
8605 \begin_inset space ~
8608 Nestable You can nest them.
8609 You can nest other things into them.
8613 \begin_layout Itemize
8619 \begin_layout Itemize
8625 \begin_layout Itemize
8631 \begin_layout Itemize
8637 \begin_layout Itemize
8643 \begin_layout Itemize
8649 \begin_layout Itemize
8655 \begin_layout Itemize
8662 \begin_layout Itemize
8668 \begin_layout Itemize
8675 \begin_layout Description
8676 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8677 You can't nest anything into them.
8681 \begin_layout Itemize
8687 \begin_layout Itemize
8693 \begin_layout Itemize
8699 \begin_layout Itemize
8705 \begin_layout Itemize
8711 \begin_layout Itemize
8717 \begin_layout Itemize
8723 \begin_layout Itemize
8729 \begin_layout Itemize
8735 \begin_layout Itemize
8741 \begin_layout Itemize
8747 \begin_layout Itemize
8753 \begin_layout Itemize
8759 \begin_layout Itemize
8763 \begin_inset space ~
8769 \begin_layout Itemize
8776 \begin_layout Standard
8777 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8785 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8795 \begin_inset space ~
8798 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8799 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8800 nested section headings violate this.
8808 \begin_layout Subsection
8809 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8810 \begin_inset Index idx
8813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8814 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8822 \begin_layout Standard
8823 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8824 affected by nesting anyhow.
8828 \begin_layout Itemize
8832 \begin_layout Itemize
8836 \begin_layout Itemize
8840 \begin_layout Standard
8842 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8850 Figures and tables in
8854 are not affected by this.
8859 Have a look at section
8860 \begin_inset space ~
8864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8866 reference "sec:Floats"
8870 for more information about
8877 \begin_layout Standard
8879 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8880 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8884 \begin_layout Standard
8885 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8893 of its own, it behaves just like a
8894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8901 paragraph environment.
8902 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8906 \begin_layout Standard
8907 Here's an example with a table:
8910 \begin_layout Enumerate
8915 \begin_layout Enumerate
8916 This is (a) and it's nested.
8920 \begin_layout Standard
8921 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8927 \begin_layout Standard
8929 \begin_inset Tabular
8930 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8931 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8932 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8933 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9017 \begin_layout Standard
9018 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9025 \begin_layout Enumerate
9027 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9031 \begin_layout Enumerate
9035 \begin_layout Standard
9036 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9039 \begin_layout Enumerate
9044 \begin_layout Enumerate
9045 This is (a) and it's nested.
9049 \begin_layout Standard
9050 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9056 \begin_layout Standard
9058 \begin_inset Tabular
9059 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9060 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9061 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9062 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9146 \begin_layout Standard
9147 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9153 \begin_layout Enumerate
9160 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9163 \begin_layout Enumerate
9167 \begin_layout Standard
9168 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9172 \begin_layout Standard
9173 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9176 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9179 \begin_layout Enumerate
9184 \begin_layout Enumerate
9185 This is (a) and it's nested.
9188 \begin_layout Standard
9189 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9195 \begin_layout Standard
9197 \begin_inset Tabular
9198 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9199 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9200 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9201 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9286 \begin_layout Standard
9287 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9293 \begin_layout Enumerate
9295 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9302 \begin_layout Enumerate
9306 \begin_layout Standard
9307 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9313 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9314 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9318 \begin_layout Subsection
9319 Usage and General Features
9322 \begin_layout Standard
9323 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9324 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9333 is the innermost possible depth.
9334 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9337 \begin_layout Enumerate
9338 level #1 – outermost
9342 \begin_layout Enumerate
9347 \begin_layout Enumerate
9352 \begin_layout Enumerate
9357 \begin_layout Itemize
9362 \begin_layout Itemize
9371 \begin_layout Standard
9372 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9373 both of them in the example.
9374 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9384 For example, if we tried to nest another
9389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9396 , we would get errors.
9399 \begin_layout Subsection
9401 \begin_inset Index idx
9404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9413 \begin_layout Standard
9414 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9415 We have several examples of nested environments.
9416 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9420 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9421 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9424 \begin_layout Labeling
9425 \labelwidthstring MMM
9426 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9435 \begin_layout Labeling
9436 \labelwidthstring MMM
9437 #2-a This is level #2.
9438 We created it by using
9441 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9447 arg "depth-increment"
9454 \begin_layout Labeling
9455 \labelwidthstring MMM
9456 #3-a This is level #3.
9457 This time, we just enter
9464 arg "depth-increment"
9468 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9472 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9478 arg "depth-increment"
9485 \begin_layout Standard
9490 environment, nested inside of
9491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9499 So, it's at level #4.
9500 We did this by entering
9503 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9509 arg "depth-increment"
9512 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9517 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9533 \begin_layout Standard
9538 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9541 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9547 \begin_layout Labeling
9548 \labelwidthstring MMM
9549 #4-a This is level #4.
9553 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9556 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9561 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9565 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9570 keep nesting things inside
9571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9582 \begin_layout Labeling
9583 \labelwidthstring MMM
9584 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9589 \begin_layout Labeling
9590 \labelwidthstring MMM
9591 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9592 and this is level #6.
9593 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9597 \begin_layout Labeling
9598 \labelwidthstring MMM
9599 #5-b Back to level #5.
9603 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9609 arg "depth-decrement"
9616 \begin_layout Labeling
9617 \labelwidthstring MMM
9621 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9627 arg "depth-decrement"
9630 , we're back at level #4.
9634 \begin_layout Labeling
9635 \labelwidthstring MMM
9636 #3-b Back to level #3.
9637 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9641 \begin_layout Labeling
9642 \labelwidthstring MMM
9643 #2-b Back to level #2.
9648 \begin_layout Labeling
9649 \labelwidthstring MMM
9650 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9651 After this sentence, we will enter
9655 and change the paragraph environment back to
9662 \begin_layout Standard
9663 We could have also used the
9679 environment in place of the
9684 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9687 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9688 Example 2: Inheritance
9691 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9692 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9695 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9704 arg "depth-increment"
9708 \begin_inset Newline newline
9711 which, we will change to the
9719 \begin_layout Enumerate
9724 environment, at level #2.
9727 \begin_layout Enumerate
9728 Notice how the nested
9732 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9736 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9740 \begin_layout Standard
9741 We ended this example by entering
9746 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9750 and reset the nesting depth by using
9753 arg "depth-decrement"
9759 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9760 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9769 \begin_inset Argument 1
9772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9773 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9781 \begin_layout Enumerate
9782 This is level #1, in an
9786 paragraph environment.
9787 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9791 \begin_layout Enumerate
9796 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9802 arg "depth-increment"
9806 Now, what happens if we nest an
9810 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9811 label be? An asterisk?
9815 \begin_layout Itemize
9825 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9826 So, its label is a bullet.
9827 (We got here by using
9830 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9836 arg "depth-increment"
9839 , then changing the environment to
9847 \begin_layout Itemize
9848 Here's level #4, produced using
9851 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9857 arg "depth-increment"
9861 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9866 \begin_layout Enumerate
9869 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9874 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9878 , because we are in the
9886 environment (that is, it is an
9901 \begin_layout Enumerate
9906 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9907 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9911 \begin_layout Enumerate
9912 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9915 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9918 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9921 \begin_layout Enumerate
9925 arg "depth-decrement"
9928 to decrease the depth after the next
9931 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9938 \begin_layout Enumerate
9940 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9945 \begin_layout Enumerate
9947 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9948 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9952 \begin_layout Enumerate
9953 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9962 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9967 reset the counter for the label.
9971 \begin_layout Enumerate
9975 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9981 arg "depth-decrement"
9984 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9985 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9986 into the twofold-nested
9994 \begin_layout Enumerate
9995 The same thing happens if we do another
9998 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10004 arg "depth-decrement"
10007 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10010 \begin_layout Standard
10011 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10016 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10027 The number of other
10031 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10038 The same rule applies for the
10042 environment, as well.
10045 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10046 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10049 \begin_layout Enumerate
10050 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10051 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10052 the same detail with how we did it.
10061 \begin_layout Standard
10069 arg "depth-increment"
10076 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10077 the example in parentheses someplace.
10078 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10079 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10080 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10084 \begin_layout Enumerate
10089 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10093 \begin_layout Verse
10094 Now we will add verse.
10095 \begin_inset Newline newline
10098 It will get much worse.
10099 \begin_inset Newline newline
10109 arg "depth-increment"
10119 \begin_layout Verse
10120 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10121 \begin_inset Newline newline
10124 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10125 \begin_inset Newline newline
10131 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10139 \begin_layout Verse
10140 Here comes a table:
10144 \begin_layout Standard
10145 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10151 \begin_layout Standard
10153 \begin_inset Tabular
10154 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10155 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10156 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10157 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10242 \begin_layout Verse
10246 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10256 arg "depth-increment"
10262 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10268 \begin_inset Newline newline
10276 arg "depth-decrement"
10283 \begin_layout Enumerate
10288 : level #1) This is another item.
10289 Note that selecting a
10293 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10294 3 times to put the table inside the
10302 \begin_layout Quotation
10303 We're now ending the
10307 list and changing to
10312 We're still at level #1.
10313 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10314 The next set of paragraphs is a
10315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10322 We will nest both the
10329 \begin_inset space ~
10334 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10338 for the letter body.
10342 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10345 to preserve the depth.
10346 Remember that you need to use
10349 arg "newline-insert newline"
10352 to create multiple lines inside the
10359 \begin_inset space ~
10369 \begin_layout Right Address
10371 \begin_inset Newline newline
10374 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10375 \begin_inset Newline newline
10381 \begin_layout Address
10383 \begin_inset space ~
10389 \begin_layout Quotation
10390 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10391 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10394 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10395 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10396 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10397 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10398 as soon as possible.
10399 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10402 \begin_layout Quotation
10403 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10404 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10405 with your order, along with payment.
10408 \begin_layout Quotation
10409 We thank you again for your patience.
10412 \begin_layout Address
10414 \begin_inset Newline newline
10421 \begin_layout Quotation
10422 That ends that example!
10425 \begin_layout Standard
10426 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10427 gives you a lot of power with just
10429 We could have easily nested an
10450 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10453 \begin_layout Subsection
10455 \begin_inset Index idx
10458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10459 Nesting ! Separation
10465 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10467 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10474 \begin_layout Standard
10475 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10477 For example you need two different enumerations:
10480 \begin_layout Enumerate
10485 \begin_layout Enumerate
10490 \begin_layout Enumerate
10494 \begin_layout Standard
10495 \begin_inset Separator plain
10501 \begin_layout Itemize
10507 \begin_layout Standard
10508 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10514 \begin_layout Enumerate
10518 \begin_layout Enumerate
10522 \begin_layout Enumerate
10526 \begin_layout Standard
10527 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10528 list item and use the menu
10530 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10531 Separated <Name> Above
10535 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10536 Separated <Name> Below
10539 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10540 ) and before or behind it the
10542 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10545 \begin_layout Standard
10546 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10547 (red arrow in LyX).
10548 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10549 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10552 \begin_layout Standard
10553 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10556 arg "paragraph-break"
10563 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10566 \begin_layout Section
10567 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10568 \begin_inset Index idx
10571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10580 \begin_layout Standard
10581 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10582 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10584 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10585 be broken at the end of a line.
10586 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10590 \begin_layout Subsection
10592 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10594 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10599 \begin_inset Index idx
10602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10611 \begin_layout Standard
10612 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10613 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10614 ) not to break the line at
10616 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10619 \begin_layout Quote
10620 Further documentation is given in section
10621 \begin_inset Newline newline
10625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10627 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10635 \begin_layout Standard
10636 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10649 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10651 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10660 A protected space is set with
10662 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10663 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10665 \begin_inset space ~
10673 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10679 \begin_layout Subsection
10681 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10683 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10688 \begin_inset Index idx
10691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10692 Spacing ! Horizontal
10700 \begin_layout Standard
10701 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10703 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10704 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10708 The length units are listed in Appendix
10709 \begin_inset space ~
10713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10715 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10722 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10724 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10726 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10731 \begin_inset Index idx
10734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10735 Spaces ! Inter-word
10743 \begin_layout Standard
10744 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10745 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10746 at the ends of sentences.
10747 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10748 automatically takes care about this.
10749 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10750 followed by a period; see section
10751 \begin_inset space ~
10755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10757 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10762 To insert a normal space, select
10764 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10765 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10767 \begin_inset space ~
10775 arg "space-insert normal"
10781 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10783 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10785 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10790 \begin_inset Index idx
10793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10802 \begin_layout Standard
10804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10811 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10820 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10821 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10822 inside abbreviations:
10825 \begin_layout Quote
10827 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10831 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10834 \begin_layout Standard
10835 or between values and units.
10836 Compare for example this:
10837 \begin_inset Newline newline
10841 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10845 \begin_inset Newline newline
10848 10 kg (normal space
10851 \begin_layout Standard
10852 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10854 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10855 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10857 \begin_inset space ~
10865 arg "space-insert thin"
10871 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10875 \begin_layout Standard
10876 You can also insert the following space types:
10879 \begin_layout Description
10881 \begin_inset space ~
10885 \begin_inset space ~
10888 space A line with a
10889 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10893 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10897 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10900 negative thin space between the arrows.
10903 \begin_layout Description
10905 \begin_inset space ~
10909 \begin_inset space ~
10912 space A line with a
10913 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10917 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10921 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10924 negative medium space between the arrows.
10927 \begin_layout Description
10929 \begin_inset space ~
10933 \begin_inset space ~
10936 space A line with a
10937 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10941 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10945 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10948 negative thick space between the arrows.
10951 \begin_layout Description
10953 \begin_inset space ~
10957 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10961 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10965 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10969 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10973 \begin_inset space ~
10977 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10980 em) space between the arrows.
10983 \begin_layout Description
10985 \begin_inset space ~
10989 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10993 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10997 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11001 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11005 \begin_inset space ~
11009 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11012 em) space between the arrows.
11015 \begin_layout Description
11017 \begin_inset space ~
11021 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11025 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11029 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11033 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11037 \begin_inset space ~
11041 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11044 em) space between the arrows.
11047 \begin_layout Description
11049 \begin_inset space ~
11053 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11057 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11062 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11066 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11069 cm space between the arrows.
11072 \begin_layout Standard
11074 \begin_inset space ~
11078 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11080 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11084 lists the different space sizes.
11087 \begin_layout Standard
11088 \begin_inset Float table
11093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11094 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11097 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11099 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11103 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11113 \begin_inset Tabular
11114 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11115 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11116 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11117 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11157 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11181 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11205 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11229 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11233 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11237 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11261 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11285 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11300 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11313 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11328 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11341 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11356 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11369 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11390 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11392 \begin_inset Index idx
11395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11404 \begin_layout Standard
11405 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11406 feature for adding extra space
11407 in a uniform fashion.
11408 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11409 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11410 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11411 equally between themselves.
11414 \begin_layout Standard
11415 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11418 \begin_layout Quote
11420 This is on the left side
11421 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11424 This is on the right
11427 \begin_layout Quote
11430 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11434 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11440 \begin_layout Quote
11443 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11447 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11451 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11457 \begin_layout Standard
11458 That was an example in the
11464 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11468 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11472 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11475 is one in a standard paragraph.
11476 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11480 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11483 \begin_layout Standard
11484 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11487 \begin_inset space ~
11492 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11495 \begin_layout Standard
11497 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11501 \begin_inset space ~
11507 \begin_layout Standard
11509 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11513 \begin_inset space ~
11519 \begin_layout Standard
11521 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11525 \begin_inset space ~
11531 \begin_layout Standard
11533 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11537 \begin_inset space ~
11543 \begin_layout Standard
11545 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11549 \begin_inset space ~
11555 \begin_layout Standard
11557 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11561 \begin_inset space ~
11567 \begin_layout Standard
11568 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11576 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11580 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11582 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11583 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11587 option in the space dialog.
11595 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11597 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11599 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11604 \begin_inset Index idx
11607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11616 \begin_layout Standard
11617 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11618 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11621 \begin_layout Standard
11622 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11625 What is correct English?:
11626 \begin_inset Newline newline
11630 \begin_inset Newline newline
11634 \begin_inset space ~
11637 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11638 \begin_inset Newline newline
11642 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11653 \begin_inset Newline newline
11657 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11668 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11674 \begin_layout Standard
11676 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11681 \begin_inset space ~
11685 \begin_inset space ~
11689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11693 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11695 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11696 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11700 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11706 \begin_inset space ~
11710 \begin_inset space ~
11714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11717 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11726 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11727 That is why it is named
11728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11736 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11737 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11741 \begin_layout Subsection
11743 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11745 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11750 \begin_inset Index idx
11753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11762 \begin_layout Standard
11763 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11765 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11766 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11768 \begin_inset space ~
11774 There you find the following sizes:
11777 \begin_layout Standard
11790 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11791 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11796 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11798 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11799 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11801 \begin_inset space ~
11807 \begin_inset Index idx
11810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11811 Document ! Settings
11816 for the paragraph separation.
11817 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11828 \begin_layout Standard
11834 \begin_inset Index idx
11837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11843 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11844 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11849 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11850 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11859 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11868 s are described in section
11869 \begin_inset space ~
11873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11875 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11884 If there are several
11888 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11889 You can therefore use
11893 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11896 \begin_layout Standard
11901 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11902 \begin_inset space ~
11906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11908 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11915 \begin_layout Standard
11916 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11926 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11927 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11939 \begin_layout Subsection
11940 Paragraph Alignment
11941 \begin_inset Index idx
11944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11945 Paragraph ! Alignment
11953 \begin_layout Standard
11954 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11956 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11959 dialog (toolbar button
11962 arg "layout-paragraph"
11966 There are five possibilities:
11969 \begin_layout Itemize
11977 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11983 \begin_layout Itemize
11991 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11997 \begin_layout Itemize
12005 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12011 \begin_layout Itemize
12019 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12025 \begin_layout Itemize
12033 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12039 \begin_layout Standard
12040 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12041 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12042 the left and right margins.
12043 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12046 \begin_layout Standard
12048 This paragraph is right aligned,
12051 \begin_layout Standard
12053 this one is centered,
12056 \begin_layout Standard
12058 this one is left aligned.
12061 \begin_layout Subsection
12063 \begin_inset Index idx
12066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12067 Page breaks ! Forced
12073 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12075 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12082 \begin_layout Standard
12083 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12084 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12085 force a page break where you want one.
12086 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12087 is good at page breaking.
12088 Only if you use a lot of
12092 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12093 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12096 \begin_layout Standard
12097 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12098 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12102 have to change the page breaking.
12105 \begin_layout Standard
12106 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12108 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12110 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12111 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12113 \begin_inset space ~
12119 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12121 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12122 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12124 \begin_inset space ~
12129 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12131 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12132 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12135 \begin_layout Standard
12136 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12137 at the top of a page.
12138 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12140 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12141 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12142 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12146 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12150 to learn more about
12157 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12159 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12161 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12166 \begin_inset Index idx
12169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12170 Page breaks ! Clear
12178 \begin_layout Standard
12179 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12180 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12181 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12182 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12183 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12186 \begin_layout Standard
12187 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12189 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12190 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12192 \begin_inset space ~
12198 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12200 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12201 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12203 \begin_inset space ~
12207 \begin_inset space ~
12212 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12213 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12216 \begin_layout Subsection
12218 \begin_inset Index idx
12221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12228 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12230 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12237 \begin_layout Standard
12238 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12240 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12242 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12243 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12245 \begin_inset space ~
12249 \begin_inset space ~
12257 arg "newline-insert newline"
12261 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12263 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12264 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12266 \begin_inset space ~
12270 \begin_inset space ~
12278 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12281 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12283 This is useful to avoid
12284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12291 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12294 \begin_layout Standard
12295 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12296 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12298 very good at line breaking.
12299 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12300 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12301 \begin_inset space ~
12305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12307 reference "sec:Quote"
12312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12314 reference "sec:Verse"
12319 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12321 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12328 \begin_layout Subsection
12330 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12332 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12337 \begin_inset Index idx
12340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12349 \begin_layout Standard
12351 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12362 \begin_layout Standard
12366 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12367 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12369 \begin_inset space ~
12374 you can insert horizontal lines.
12375 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12376 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12377 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12380 \begin_layout Standard
12382 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12393 \begin_layout Section
12394 Characters and Symbols
12397 \begin_layout Standard
12398 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12399 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12400 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12402 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12408 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12412 for information on how this is done.
12415 \begin_layout Standard
12416 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12421 dialog via the menu
12423 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12424 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12430 \begin_layout Standard
12431 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12439 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12440 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12442 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12450 \begin_layout Section
12451 Fonts and Text Styles
12452 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12454 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12461 \begin_layout Subsection
12463 \begin_inset Index idx
12466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12475 \begin_layout Standard
12476 There are two types of fonts:
12479 \begin_layout Description
12481 \begin_inset space ~
12485 \begin_inset Index idx
12488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12494 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12495 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12499 characters) in the font.
12500 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12501 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12502 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12503 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12504 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12505 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12506 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12507 \begin_inset Newline newline
12510 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12511 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12512 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12513 sizes than at small ones.
12514 \begin_inset Newline newline
12528 \begin_inset space ~
12536 \begin_layout Description
12538 \begin_inset space ~
12542 \begin_inset Index idx
12545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12551 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12552 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12553 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12554 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12555 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12556 image manipulation program.
12557 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12558 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12559 \begin_inset space ~
12562 pixels high up to 34
12563 \begin_inset space ~
12566 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12567 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12568 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12570 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12571 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12572 \begin_inset Newline newline
12575 Bitmap fonts are named
12578 \begin_inset space ~
12583 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12586 \begin_layout Standard
12587 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12588 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12589 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12590 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12591 use scalable fonts.
12594 \begin_layout Standard
12595 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12598 \begin_layout Standard
12599 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12600 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12601 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12602 font to emphasize text, you use an
12603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12611 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12613 In \SpecialChar LyX
12614 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12618 \begin_layout Subsection
12621 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12623 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12630 \begin_layout Standard
12631 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12632 used its own fonts.
12633 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12634 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12637 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12638 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12639 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12640 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12641 to a word processor.
12642 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12643 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12644 files are very portable across
12645 different machines.
12646 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12647 has increased a lot
12648 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12651 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12653 \begin_inset space ~
12657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12659 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12664 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12665 code in the document
12666 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12669 \begin_layout Standard
12670 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12671 engines that are also able directly
12672 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12674 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12676 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12678 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12679 that is installed on your system.
12680 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12683 \begin_layout Standard
12684 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12692 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12693 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12701 \begin_layout Subsection
12702 Document Font and Font size
12703 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12705 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12710 \begin_inset Index idx
12713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12720 \begin_inset Index idx
12723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12732 \begin_layout Standard
12733 You can set the document fonts in the
12735 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12739 \begin_inset Index idx
12742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12743 Document ! Settings
12753 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12754 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12757 \begin_inset space ~
12766 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12768 \begin_inset space ~
12771 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12774 \begin_layout Standard
12779 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12780 This requires that you use
12792 as the output format, i.
12793 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12797 \begin_inset space \space{}
12800 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12801 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12802 installed (see section
12803 \begin_inset space ~
12807 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12809 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12814 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12816 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12817 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12819 \begin_inset space ~
12822 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12823 cannot determine the family.
12824 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12825 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12828 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12831 \begin_layout Standard
12832 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12833 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12838 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12844 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12845 With LyX's default font encoding, this is a look-alike of the standard
12848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12854 \begin_inset space ~
12860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12885 European Computer Modern
12888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12896 However, some classes set different default fonts.
12899 \begin_layout Standard
12904 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
12905 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12910 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
12913 \begin_inset space ~
12918 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12924 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12925 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12928 \begin_layout Itemize
12932 \begin_inset space ~
12937 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12950 \begin_inset space ~
12955 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12956 community in order to replace
12960 as the default font.
12961 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12962 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12965 \begin_inset space ~
12978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12979 One difference is improved kerning.
12987 \begin_layout Itemize
12988 If you do not like the look of
12996 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12997 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13001 \begin_inset space ~
13007 \begin_inset space ~
13017 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13018 \begin_inset space ~
13021 serif and typewriter fonts,
13025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13026 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13027 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13033 \begin_inset space ~
13042 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13043 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13047 \begin_inset space \space{}
13055 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13059 \begin_inset space \space{}
13065 \begin_inset space ~
13073 \begin_inset space ~
13083 but you can also select your own.
13084 \begin_inset Newline newline
13087 The differences between roman,
13090 \begin_inset space ~
13099 fonts are explained in section
13100 \begin_inset space ~
13104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13106 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13111 \begin_inset Newline newline
13117 \begin_inset space ~
13122 was originally designed for newspapers.
13123 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13124 into the small newspaper columns.
13128 \begin_inset space ~
13133 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13136 \begin_layout Standard
13137 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13150 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13155 depends on the class you are using.
13156 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13159 \begin_layout Standard
13160 Note that the font size is the
13165 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13166 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13167 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13168 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13171 \begin_inset space ~
13177 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13178 \begin_inset space ~
13182 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13184 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13191 \begin_layout Standard
13195 \begin_inset space ~
13200 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13202 \begin_inset space ~
13205 serif or typewriter.
13210 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13220 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13223 \begin_layout Standard
13228 LaTeX font encoding
13230 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13231 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13237 \begin_inset Index idx
13240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13248 \begin_inset space ~
13252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13254 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13259 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13260 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13267 \begin_layout Standard
13268 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13270 Use Old Style Figures
13274 Use True Small Caps
13277 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13280 Use Old Style Figures
13282 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13284 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13285 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13289 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13292 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13296 Use True Small Caps
13298 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13299 of scaled capitals.
13300 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13301 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13304 \begin_layout Standard
13309 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13310 a font to display the script characters.
13314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13315 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13321 \begin_inset Index idx
13324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13331 So this has no effect for the document language
13347 \begin_layout Standard
13350 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13352 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13353 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13359 \begin_inset Index idx
13362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13364 packages ! microtype
13373 \begin_layout Standard
13376 Disallow line breaks after dashes
13378 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
13382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13383 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13384 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13390 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
13391 \begin_inset space ~
13395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13397 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
13407 \begin_layout Standard
13408 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13412 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13420 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13425 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13426 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13428 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13430 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13433 dialog, see section
13434 \begin_inset space ~
13438 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13440 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13452 \begin_layout Subsection
13456 \begin_layout Standard
13457 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13458 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13460 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13461 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13462 choose a math font in the dialog
13464 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13468 \begin_inset Index idx
13471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13472 Document ! Settings
13478 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13479 automatically selects a math font.
13480 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13481 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13490 \begin_inset space ~
13496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13501 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13502 document font is available.
13505 \begin_layout Standard
13506 Note that the math font will not be used for
13510 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13516 or by the insertion of the command
13523 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13524 \begin_inset space ~
13528 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13529 while the math characters do not.
13531 \begin_inset space ~
13534 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13537 \begin_inset space ~
13545 \begin_inset space ~
13550 in the document font settings.
13553 \begin_layout Standard
13554 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13555 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13556 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13557 font (in most cases
13558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13564 \begin_inset space ~
13570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13573 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13574 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13582 \begin_inset space ~
13588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13594 \begin_layout Subsection
13595 Using Different Character Styles
13596 \begin_inset Index idx
13599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13606 \begin_inset Index idx
13609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13618 \begin_layout Standard
13619 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13620 automatically changes the character style for certain
13621 paragraph environments.
13623 supports two character styles,
13632 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13636 \begin_layout Standard
13641 style, do one of the following:
13644 \begin_layout Itemize
13645 click on the toolbar button
13654 \begin_layout Itemize
13655 use the key binding
13664 \begin_layout Standard
13665 These commands are all toggles.
13670 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13673 \begin_layout Standard
13674 One typically uses the
13678 style for proper names.
13680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13687 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13695 \begin_layout Standard
13696 A more widely used character style is the
13701 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13708 \begin_layout Itemize
13709 clicking on the toolbar button
13718 \begin_layout Itemize
13719 using the keybindings
13728 \begin_layout Standard
13733 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13735 use a different font.
13738 \begin_layout Standard
13739 We've been using the
13743 style all over the place in this document.
13744 Here's one more example:
13747 \begin_layout Quotation
13750 Do not overuse character styles!
13753 \begin_layout Standard
13754 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13755 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13756 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13757 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13761 \begin_layout Standard
13762 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13770 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13772 \begin_inset space ~
13775 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13781 arg "dialog-show character"
13787 \begin_layout Subsection
13788 Fine-Tuning with the
13793 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13795 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13800 \begin_inset Index idx
13803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13812 \begin_layout Standard
13813 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13815 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13816 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13817 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13818 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13819 from ordinary dialog.
13822 \begin_layout Standard
13823 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13824 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13825 \begin_inset Newline newline
13828 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13829 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13832 \begin_layout Standard
13833 To use custom character styles, open the
13835 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13837 \begin_inset space ~
13840 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13843 dialog or press the toolbar button
13846 arg "dialog-show character"
13850 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13851 font property that you can choose.
13852 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13855 \begin_inset space ~
13860 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13865 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13866 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13867 environments all at once.
13870 \begin_layout Standard
13871 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13874 \begin_inset space ~
13886 \begin_layout Labeling
13887 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13901 The possible options are:
13905 \begin_layout Labeling
13906 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13911 This is the Roman font family.
13912 Normally a serif font.
13913 It's also the default family.
13923 \begin_layout Labeling
13924 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13928 \begin_inset space ~
13935 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13947 \begin_layout Labeling
13948 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13955 This is the Typewriter font family.
13961 arg "font-typewriter"
13970 \begin_layout Labeling
13971 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13976 This corresponds to the print weight.
13981 \begin_layout Labeling
13982 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13987 This is the Medium font series.
13988 It's also the default series.
13991 \begin_layout Labeling
13992 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13999 This is the Bold font series.
14012 \begin_layout Labeling
14013 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14018 As the name implies.
14023 \begin_layout Labeling
14024 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14029 This is the Upright font shape.
14030 It's also the default shape.
14033 \begin_layout Labeling
14034 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14048 s the Italic font shape
14054 \begin_layout Labeling
14055 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14062 This is the Slanted font shape
14064 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14065 , this is different from italic).
14068 \begin_layout Labeling
14069 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14073 \begin_inset space ~
14080 This is the Small caps font shape
14087 \begin_layout Labeling
14088 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14093 Alters the text color.
14094 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14098 \begin_inset space ~
14103 , which means that the document default color set in
14105 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14106 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14112 \begin_inset space ~
14117 is used, you can choose between
14194 \begin_inset Index idx
14197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14206 \begin_layout Labeling
14207 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14212 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14213 the language of the document.
14214 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14215 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14217 \begin_inset Newline newline
14220 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14222 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14223 When using the spell checking (see section
14224 \begin_inset space ~
14228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14230 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14234 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14237 \begin_layout Labeling
14238 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14243 Alters the size of the font.
14244 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14245 proportional to the document font size.
14246 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14247 the details, but a general description of what
14253 \begin_layout Labeling
14254 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14275 arg "font-size tiny"
14281 \begin_layout Labeling
14282 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14303 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14309 \begin_layout Labeling
14310 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14331 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14337 \begin_layout Labeling
14338 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14359 arg "font-size small"
14365 \begin_layout Labeling
14366 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14380 It's also the default size.
14384 arg "font-size normal"
14390 \begin_layout Labeling
14391 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14412 arg "font-size large"
14418 \begin_layout Labeling
14419 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14440 arg "font-size larger"
14446 \begin_layout Labeling
14447 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14468 arg "font-size largest"
14474 \begin_layout Labeling
14475 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14496 arg "font-size huge"
14502 \begin_layout Labeling
14503 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14524 arg "font-size giant"
14530 \begin_layout Labeling
14531 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14536 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14549 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14556 arg "font-size increase"
14562 \begin_layout Labeling
14563 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14568 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14588 arg "font-size decrease"
14595 \begin_layout Standard
14600 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14601 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14603 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14604 — use those instead.
14605 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14608 \begin_layout Labeling
14609 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14614 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14619 \begin_layout Labeling
14620 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14627 This is text with emphasize on
14630 This might seem like the same as
14634 , but it is actually a bit different.
14640 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14642 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14645 \begin_layout Labeling
14646 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14653 This is text with Underbar on.
14659 arg "font-underline"
14665 \begin_inset Newline newline
14670 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14671 when you could not change fonts.
14672 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14673 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14674 because some people
14678 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14681 \begin_layout Labeling
14682 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14686 \begin_inset space ~
14693 This is text with Double underbar on.
14699 arg "font-underunderline"
14703 \begin_inset Newline newline
14706 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14707 about double underbar.
14710 \begin_layout Labeling
14711 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14715 \begin_inset space ~
14722 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14728 arg "font-underwave"
14732 \begin_inset Newline newline
14735 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14736 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14739 \begin_layout Labeling
14740 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14744 \begin_inset space ~
14751 This is text with Strikeout on.
14757 arg "font-strikeout"
14761 \begin_inset Newline newline
14764 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14765 changed in the meantime.
14768 \begin_layout Labeling
14769 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14773 \begin_inset space ~
14780 This is text with Cross out on.
14783 \begin_inset Newline newline
14786 This is used to make text hardly readable.
14789 \begin_layout Labeling
14790 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14797 This is text with Noun on.
14804 , this is a logical attribute.
14805 Normally it's equivalent to
14808 \begin_inset space ~
14817 \begin_layout Standard
14818 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14819 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14821 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14823 \begin_inset space ~
14826 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14832 arg "dialog-show character"
14835 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14836 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14839 arg "textstyle-apply"
14843 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14847 \begin_layout Standard
14848 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14855 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14856 (suppose you just set the shape to
14857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14875 \begin_inset space ~
14887 \begin_layout Standard
14888 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14896 \begin_inset space ~
14908 \begin_layout Itemize
14914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14921 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14930 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14934 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14939 \begin_inset Newline newline
14943 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14957 \begin_inset Note Note
14960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14961 For more on phantoms see section
14962 \begin_inset space ~
14966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14968 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14978 \begin_inset Newline newline
14984 \begin_layout Itemize
14989 fonts use characters with serifs.
14990 These are the small
14991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14998 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14999 The following example shows the difference:
15000 \begin_inset Newline newline
15004 \begin_inset Newline newline
15009 text without serifs
15012 \begin_inset Newline newline
15015 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15016 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15023 \begin_layout Itemize
15028 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15029 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15030 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15033 \begin_layout Standard
15034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15041 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15042 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15045 \begin_inset space ~
15050 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15051 the property to be removed.
15052 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15053 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15054 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15057 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15061 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15072 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15073 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15081 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15085 \begin_inset space ~
15090 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15101 If you, for example, set
15102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15120 \begin_inset space ~
15125 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15134 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15137 \begin_layout Standard
15138 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15139 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15142 \begin_layout Section
15143 Printing and Previewing
15146 \begin_layout Subsection
15150 \begin_layout Standard
15151 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15152 using \SpecialChar LyX
15153 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15154 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15155 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15156 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15158 Additional Features
15163 \begin_layout Standard
15165 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15168 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15169 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15170 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15173 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15174 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15175 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15176 to turn your writing into printable output.
15177 This happens in two stages:
15180 \begin_layout Enumerate
15181 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15182 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15184 a file with the extension,
15185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15199 \begin_layout Enumerate
15200 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15201 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15202 to use the commands in the
15206 file to produce printable output.
15209 \begin_layout Subsection
15210 Output file formats
15211 \begin_inset Index idx
15214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15221 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15223 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15230 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15231 Simple text (ASCII)
15232 \begin_inset Index idx
15235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15236 File formats ! ASCII
15244 \begin_layout Standard
15245 This file type has the extension
15246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15258 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15262 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15269 \begin_layout Standard
15270 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15272 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15273 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15275 \begin_inset space ~
15281 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15282 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15283 bibliography (section
15284 \begin_inset space ~
15288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15290 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15295 If your document includes such material, use
15297 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15298 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15300 \begin_inset space ~
15304 \begin_inset space ~
15308 \begin_inset space ~
15316 \begin_inset space ~
15320 \begin_inset space ~
15326 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15327 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15330 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15333 \begin_inset Index idx
15336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15337 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15346 \begin_layout Standard
15347 This file type has the extension
15348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15359 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15362 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15363 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15364 -Errors or to process it manually
15365 with console commands.
15366 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15367 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15368 's temporary directory whenever you
15369 view or export your document.
15372 \begin_layout Standard
15373 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15374 -file using the menu
15376 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15377 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15381 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15382 export variants are explained in section
15383 \begin_inset space ~
15387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15389 reference "subsec:Export"
15396 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15398 \begin_inset Index idx
15401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15410 \begin_layout Standard
15411 This file type has the extension
15412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15432 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15433 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15434 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15438 \begin_layout Standard
15439 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15440 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15441 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15442 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15443 when you view the DVI.
15444 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15447 \begin_layout Standard
15448 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15450 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15451 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15456 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15457 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15459 \begin_inset space ~
15465 The latter option uses the program
15467 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15473 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15476 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15477 font access (see section
15478 \begin_inset space ~
15482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15484 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15489 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15490 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15495 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15497 \begin_inset Index idx
15500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15501 File formats ! PostScript
15509 \begin_layout Standard
15510 This file type has the extension
15511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15523 PostScript was developed by the company
15527 as a printer language.
15528 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15530 PostScript can be seen as a
15531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15534 programming language
15535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15538 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15543 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15550 \begin_inset Index idx
15553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15555 packages ! pstricks
15565 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15568 \begin_layout Standard
15569 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15573 Encapsulated PostScript
15574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15577 (EPS, file extension
15578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15590 As \SpecialChar LyX
15591 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15592 convert them in the background to EPS.
15593 If, for example, you have 50
15594 \begin_inset space ~
15597 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15599 \begin_inset space ~
15602 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15603 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15605 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15606 EPS to avoid this problem.
15609 \begin_layout Standard
15610 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15612 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15613 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15619 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15621 \begin_inset Index idx
15624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15631 \begin_inset Index idx
15634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15643 \begin_layout Standard
15644 This file type has the extension
15645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15661 Portable Document Format
15662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15669 was derived from PostScript.
15670 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15679 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15680 looks exactly the same.
15683 \begin_layout Standard
15684 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15688 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15692 (JPG, file extension
15693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15720 Portable Network Graphics
15721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15724 (PNG, file extension
15725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15737 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15738 converts them in the
15739 background to one of these formats.
15740 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15741 will slow down your workflow.
15742 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15745 \begin_layout Standard
15746 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15748 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15754 \begin_layout Description
15756 \begin_inset space ~
15759 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15763 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15766 \begin_layout Description
15768 \begin_inset space ~
15775 ) This uses the program
15777 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15780 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15783 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15786 is a new engine, derived from
15790 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15791 access (see section
15792 \begin_inset space ~
15796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15798 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15803 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15804 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15809 \begin_layout Description
15811 \begin_inset space ~
15818 ) This uses the program
15823 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15829 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15830 font access (see section
15831 \begin_inset space ~
15835 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15837 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15842 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15843 vertically written Japanese.
15846 \begin_layout Description
15848 \begin_inset space ~
15851 (cropped) This is the same as
15854 \begin_inset space ~
15859 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15860 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15861 to generate good-looking
15862 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15865 \begin_layout Description
15867 \begin_inset space ~
15870 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15874 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15878 \begin_layout Description
15880 \begin_inset space ~
15883 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15887 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15888 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15892 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15893 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15896 \begin_layout Standard
15900 \begin_inset space ~
15909 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15910 works without problems.
15911 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15912 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15916 \begin_inset space ~
15924 \begin_inset space ~
15929 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15937 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15939 \begin_inset Index idx
15942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15943 FileFormats ! XHTML
15949 \begin_inset Index idx
15952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15961 \begin_layout Standard
15962 This file type has the extension
15963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15975 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15976 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15977 When \SpecialChar LyX
15978 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15979 suitable for the purpose.
15980 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15982 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15983 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15986 between different formats, which are described in section
15988 Math Output in XHTML
15993 \begin_inset space ~
16001 \begin_layout Standard
16002 XHTML output remains
16003 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16010 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16011 features are supported yet.
16015 and the World Wide Web
16019 Additional Features
16021 manual, for more information.
16024 \begin_layout Standard
16025 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16027 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16028 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16034 \begin_layout Subsection
16036 \begin_inset Index idx
16039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16048 \begin_layout Standard
16049 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16050 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16059 or use the toolbar button
16066 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16067 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16068 \begin_inset space ~
16072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16074 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16078 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16080 \begin_inset space ~
16084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16086 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16091 Further output formats can be selected via
16093 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16094 View (Other Formats)
16096 or the toolbar button
16105 \begin_layout Standard
16106 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16107 viewer window using the menu
16109 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16114 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16115 Update (Other Formats)
16120 \begin_layout Standard
16121 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16124 To have a real output, export your document.
16127 \begin_layout Section
16128 A few Words about Typography
16129 \begin_inset Index idx
16132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16141 \begin_layout Subsection
16142 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16143 \begin_inset Index idx
16146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16153 \begin_inset Index idx
16156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16165 \begin_layout Standard
16166 In \SpecialChar LyX
16168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16179 symbol comes in four variants: the
16196 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16202 \begin_layout Standard
16203 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16213 height_special "totalheight"
16218 backgroundcolor "none"
16221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16222 \begin_inset Tabular
16223 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16224 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16225 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
16226 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16227 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16228 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16229 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16257 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16258 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16297 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16298 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16320 system key combination
16324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16325 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
16328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16337 and the em dash with
16340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16353 is the Mac label for the right
16364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16377 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16378 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16400 system key combination or
16401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16415 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16428 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16467 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16473 \begin_layout Standard
16474 Dashes can also be inserted with
16476 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16478 \begin_inset space ~
16481 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16489 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
16490 and 2014 for the en dash).
16493 \begin_layout Standard
16494 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
16495 mode and has a length of its own.
16496 Here are some examples:
16499 \begin_layout Enumerate
16500 line- and page-breaks
16501 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16511 \begin_layout Enumerate
16513 \begin_inset space ~
16517 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16527 \begin_layout Enumerate
16528 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
16529 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16539 \begin_layout Enumerate
16540 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16544 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16554 \begin_layout Standard
16556 \begin_inset CommandInset href
16558 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
16559 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
16567 \begin_layout Subsection
16568 Dashes and Line Breaks
16569 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16571 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
16578 \begin_layout Standard
16579 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
16580 case and locale, e.
16581 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16587 \begin_layout Itemize
16588 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
16589 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
16592 \begin_layout Itemize
16593 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
16597 \begin_layout Itemize
16598 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
16599 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
16602 \begin_layout Standard
16603 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
16604 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16615 allows line breaks after hyphens, en-dashes and em-dashes.
16618 \begin_layout Enumerate
16619 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
16620 \begin_inset space ~
16623 – common in British English and generally recommended by
16625 The Elements of Typographic Style
16628 \begin_inset space ~
16631 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
16634 \begin_layout Enumerate
16635 Unwanted line breaks after dashes can be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
16639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16642 Prevent Hyphenation
16647 \begin_inset space ~
16663 in \SpecialChar TeX
16669 \begin_layout Itemize
16671 \begin_inset space ~
16675 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16685 height_special "totalheight"
16690 backgroundcolor "none"
16693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16702 \begin_layout Itemize
16706 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16716 height_special "totalheight"
16721 backgroundcolor "none"
16724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16728 \begin_inset space ~
16736 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
16737 \begin_inset space ~
16740 – sont très utiles.
16743 \begin_layout Itemize
16750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16759 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
16763 \begin_layout Standard
16764 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
16765 \begin_inset space ~
16768 – in contrast to an overfull line
16769 \begin_inset space ~
16772 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16776 \begin_layout Standard
16777 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
16780 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16781 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16782 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
16783 Disallow line breaks after dashes
16788 \begin_layout Enumerate
16789 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
16790 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
16791 or \SpecialChar TeX
16797 \begin_layout Itemize
16801 \begin_inset space ~
16804 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
16805 \begin_inset space ~
16808 – sont très utiles.
16812 \begin_layout Enumerate
16813 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
16814 \begin_inset Newline newline
16819 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16820 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16821 Optional line break
16827 \begin_layout Itemize
16828 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
16829 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
16830 should be followed by
16831 a line break opportunity.
16834 \begin_layout Standard
16835 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
16836 \begin_inset space ~
16840 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16842 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
16853 \begin_layout Enumerate
16854 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16855 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
16856 or en dashes (see section
16857 \begin_inset space ~
16861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16863 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
16873 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16874 Changes and backwards compatibility
16877 \begin_layout Standard
16878 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
16880 \begin_inset space ~
16883 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
16884 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
16886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16893 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
16894 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
16902 \begin_layout Standard
16903 Since \SpecialChar LyX
16905 \begin_inset space ~
16908 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16910 prevents ligation to dashes.
16912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16919 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
16924 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
16925 after the input (unless the current text font is
16933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16934 The behavior was changed since
16935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16950 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
16951 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
16952 as non-breakable dashes.
16953 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
16962 \begin_layout Standard
16965 \begin_inset space ~
16973 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
16975 \begin_inset space ~
16978 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
16981 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16982 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16983 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
16984 Disallow line breaks after dashes
16986 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
16990 If you used both literal and
16991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16998 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
17000 \begin_inset space ~
17003 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
17004 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
17007 \begin_layout Subsection
17009 \begin_inset Index idx
17012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17019 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17021 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
17028 \begin_layout Standard
17029 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
17030 but automatically in the output.
17031 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17037 \begin_inset Index idx
17040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17047 following the rules of the document language.
17049 does not hyphenate text in the
17053 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
17056 \begin_layout Standard
17058 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
17062 font and with unusual constructs, like
17063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17071 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
17072 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
17073 This is done with the menu
17075 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17076 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17078 \begin_inset space ~
17084 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17086 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17090 \begin_layout Standard
17091 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
17092 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
17094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17103 would then see the hyphen
17104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17111 as a line break possibility.
17112 A line break at this point would look ugly.
17113 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
17116 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17117 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17120 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
17122 Prevent Hyphenation
17127 \begin_inset space ~
17135 \begin_layout Subsection
17137 \begin_inset Index idx
17140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17149 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17150 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
17151 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17153 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
17160 \begin_layout Standard
17161 When \SpecialChar LyX
17162 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17163 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17165 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
17168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17171 appropriate amount of space.
17172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17175 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
17177 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
17178 gets after another word.
17181 \begin_layout Standard
17182 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
17183 not work in all cases.
17185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17196 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
17197 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
17200 \begin_layout Standard
17201 Here are some examples of
17205 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
17208 \begin_layout Itemize
17213 \begin_layout Itemize
17218 \begin_layout Standard
17219 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
17222 \begin_layout Itemize
17224 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17228 this is too much space!
17231 \begin_layout Itemize
17236 \begin_layout Standard
17237 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
17240 \begin_layout Standard
17241 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
17244 \begin_layout Enumerate
17248 \begin_inset space ~
17253 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
17254 \begin_inset space ~
17258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17260 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
17265 \begin_inset Index idx
17268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17269 Spaces ! inter-word
17277 \begin_layout Enumerate
17281 \begin_inset space ~
17286 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
17287 \begin_inset space ~
17291 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17293 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
17298 \begin_inset Index idx
17301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17310 \begin_layout Enumerate
17314 \begin_inset space ~
17318 \begin_inset space ~
17322 \begin_inset space ~
17329 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17331 \begin_inset space ~
17336 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
17337 This function is also bound to
17340 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
17346 \begin_layout Standard
17347 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
17350 \begin_layout Itemize
17352 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17356 \begin_inset space \space{}
17359 this is too much space!
17362 \begin_layout Itemize
17363 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
17367 \begin_layout Standard
17368 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
17369 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
17371 will take care of this.
17374 \begin_layout Standard
17375 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
17379 \begin_inset space ~
17385 feature described in the section
17387 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
17392 Additional Features
17397 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17399 \begin_inset Index idx
17402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17403 Typography ! Quotation marks
17409 \begin_inset Index idx
17412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17413 Quotation marks | see
17417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17443 \begin_layout Standard
17445 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
17446 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
17447 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
17449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17457 The keyboard character,
17461 , generates this automatically.
17464 \begin_layout Standard
17465 You can specify what character the
17469 key produces by using the submenu
17475 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17479 \begin_inset Index idx
17482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17483 Document ! Settings
17488 dialog and switching the
17492 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
17493 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
17495 \begin_inset space ~
17501 \begin_layout Labeling
17502 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17514 \begin_inset space ~
17518 \begin_inset space ~
17522 \begin_inset Quotes els
17526 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17540 \begin_inset Quotes els
17544 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17547 quotation marks (as common, e.
17548 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17554 \begin_layout Labeling
17555 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17558 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17562 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17566 \begin_inset space ~
17570 \begin_inset space ~
17574 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17578 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17584 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17588 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17592 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17596 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17599 quotation marks (as common, e.
17600 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17606 \begin_layout Labeling
17607 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17610 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17614 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17618 \begin_inset space ~
17622 \begin_inset space ~
17626 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17630 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17636 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17640 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17644 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17648 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17651 quotation marks (as common, e.
17652 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17658 \begin_layout Labeling
17659 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17662 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17666 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17670 \begin_inset space ~
17674 \begin_inset space ~
17678 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17682 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17688 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17692 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17696 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17700 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17703 quotation marks (as common, e.
17704 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17710 \begin_layout Labeling
17711 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17714 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17718 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17722 \begin_inset space ~
17726 \begin_inset space ~
17730 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17734 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17740 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17744 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17748 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17752 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17755 quotation marks (as common, e.
17756 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17759 g., in Switzerland)
17762 \begin_layout Labeling
17763 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17766 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17770 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17774 \begin_inset space ~
17778 \begin_inset space ~
17782 \begin_inset Quotes als
17786 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17792 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17796 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17800 \begin_inset Quotes als
17804 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17807 quotation marks (as common, e.
17808 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17814 \begin_layout Labeling
17815 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17818 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17822 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17826 \begin_inset space ~
17830 \begin_inset space ~
17834 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17838 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17844 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17848 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17852 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17856 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17859 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
17862 \begin_layout Labeling
17863 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17866 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17870 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17874 \begin_inset space ~
17878 \begin_inset space ~
17882 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17886 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17892 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17896 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17900 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17904 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17907 quotation marks (as common, e.
17908 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17911 g., in Great Britain)
17914 \begin_layout Labeling
17915 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17918 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17922 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17926 \begin_inset space ~
17930 \begin_inset space ~
17934 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17938 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17944 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17948 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17952 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17956 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17959 quotation marks (as common, e.
17960 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17966 \begin_layout Labeling
17967 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17970 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17974 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17978 \begin_inset space ~
17982 \begin_inset space ~
17986 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17990 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17996 \begin_inset Quotes ild
18000 \begin_inset Quotes ird
18004 \begin_inset Quotes ils
18008 \begin_inset Quotes irs
18011 quotation marks (another style common in France)
18015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18016 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
18017 since these look identical to the inner marks.
18018 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
18019 the inner marks differ).
18027 \begin_layout Labeling
18028 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18031 \begin_inset Quotes rld
18035 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
18039 \begin_inset space ~
18043 \begin_inset space ~
18047 \begin_inset Quotes rls
18051 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
18057 \begin_inset Quotes rld
18061 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
18065 \begin_inset Quotes rls
18069 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
18072 quotation marks (as common, e.
18073 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18079 \begin_layout Labeling
18080 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18083 \begin_inset Quotes wld
18087 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
18091 \begin_inset space ~
18095 \begin_inset space ~
18099 \begin_inset Quotes wls
18103 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
18109 \begin_inset Quotes wld
18113 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
18117 \begin_inset Quotes wls
18121 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
18124 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
18127 \begin_layout Labeling
18128 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18129 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18137 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18143 \begin_inset space ~
18147 \begin_inset space ~
18153 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18161 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18165 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18169 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18173 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18177 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18180 quotation marks (as common, e.
18181 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18189 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18190 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18198 \begin_layout Labeling
18199 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18200 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18208 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18214 \begin_inset space ~
18218 \begin_inset space ~
18224 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18232 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18236 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18240 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18244 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18248 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18251 quotation marks (as common, e.
18252 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18255 g., in North Korea and China)
18259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18260 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18261 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18269 \begin_layout Standard
18270 Inner quotation marks
18274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18275 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
18276 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
18277 case (and specifically the British style shows that
18278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18285 does not necessarily mean
18286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18294 This is why we call them
18295 \begin_inset Quotes els
18299 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18315 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
18317 \begin_inset Quotes els
18321 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18324 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
18327 arg "quote-insert inner"
18332 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18338 \begin_layout Standard
18339 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
18340 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
18341 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
18342 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
18343 If you check the setting
18345 Use dynamic quotation marks
18349 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18350 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18353 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
18354 they appear in a special color).
18355 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
18356 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
18358 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18361 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
18364 \begin_layout Standard
18365 Individual quotation marks (i.
18366 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18369 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
18370 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
18374 \begin_layout Subsection
18376 \begin_inset Index idx
18379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18380 Typography ! Ligatures
18386 \begin_inset Index idx
18389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18418 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18420 name "subsec:Ligatures"
18427 \begin_layout Standard
18428 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
18429 print them as single characters.
18430 These groups are known as
18435 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
18436 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
18438 Here are the standard ligatures:
18441 \begin_layout Itemize
18445 \begin_layout Itemize
18449 \begin_layout Itemize
18453 \begin_layout Itemize
18457 \begin_layout Itemize
18461 \begin_layout Standard
18462 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
18465 \begin_layout Standard
18466 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
18467 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
18468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18475 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
18476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18491 To break a ligature, use
18493 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18494 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18496 \begin_inset space ~
18503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18514 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18531 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18539 \begin_layout Subsection
18541 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
18543 \begin_inset Index idx
18546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18556 \begin_layout Standard
18559 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18560 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
18564 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
18567 \begin_layout Description
18569 The name of the game.
18572 \begin_layout Description
18574 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
18578 \begin_layout Description
18580 The \SpecialChar TeX
18581 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
18585 \begin_layout Description
18586 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
18587 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18591 \begin_layout Standard
18592 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18598 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
18602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18606 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
18607 world to give programs geek version numbers.
18608 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
18609 converges to the number
18610 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
18613 : The actual version is
18614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18622 , the previous one was
18623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18634 \begin_layout Subsection
18636 \begin_inset Index idx
18639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18648 \begin_layout Standard
18649 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
18650 space between two words.
18651 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
18654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18661 for units use the menu
18663 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18664 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18666 \begin_inset space ~
18674 arg "space-insert thin"
18680 \begin_layout Standard
18681 Here is an example to show the differences:
18684 \begin_layout Standard
18685 \begin_inset Tabular
18686 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
18687 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18688 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18689 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18696 \begin_inset space ~
18700 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18712 space between number and unit
18719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18724 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18728 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18740 half space between number and unit
18753 \begin_layout Subsection
18755 \begin_inset Index idx
18758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18759 Typography ! Widows and orphans
18767 \begin_layout Standard
18768 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
18770 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
18771 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
18772 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
18773 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
18774 These bits of text became known as
18785 \begin_layout Standard
18786 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
18787 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
18788 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
18789 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
18790 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
18791 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
18792 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
18793 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
18794 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
18795 \begin_inset Newline newline
18803 \begin_inset Newline newline
18811 \begin_inset Newline newline
18814 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18815 preamble of your document to avoid them.
18816 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
18818 \begin_inset space ~
18822 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18824 key "latexcompanion"
18830 \begin_inset space ~
18834 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18841 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18842 's page break mechanism.
18845 \begin_layout Chapter
18846 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
18847 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18849 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
18856 \begin_layout Standard
18857 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
18860 \begin_inset space ~
18866 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
18869 \begin_layout Section
18871 \begin_inset Index idx
18874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18881 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18890 \begin_layout Standard
18892 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
18895 \begin_layout Description
18898 \begin_inset space ~
18901 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
18902 \begin_inset Newline newline
18906 \begin_inset Note Note
18909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18910 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
18918 \begin_layout Description
18919 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
18920 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
18921 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18924 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18925 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18927 \begin_inset space ~
18933 \begin_inset Newline newline
18937 \begin_inset Note Comment
18940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18941 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
18950 \begin_layout Description
18952 \begin_inset space ~
18955 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
18956 set in the document settings under
18958 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
18960 \begin_inset space ~
18966 \begin_inset Newline newline
18970 \begin_inset Newline newline
18974 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18983 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
18984 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
18989 of a comment that appears in the output.
18995 \begin_inset Newline newline
18999 \begin_inset Newline newline
19002 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
19005 \begin_layout Standard
19006 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
19014 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19018 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
19021 \begin_layout Section
19023 \begin_inset Index idx
19026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19033 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19035 name "sec:Footnotes"
19042 \begin_layout Standard
19044 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
19047 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19050 or the toolbar button
19053 arg "footnote-insert"
19065 \begin_inset Graphics
19066 filename clipart/footnote.png
19075 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19076 's representation of your footnote.
19086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19105 label, the box will
19109 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
19110 Clicking on the box label again will close
19123 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
19124 and click on the footnote
19139 \begin_layout Standard
19140 Here is an example footnote:
19148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19149 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
19157 \begin_layout Standard
19158 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
19159 position where the footnote box is placed.
19160 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
19161 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
19162 according to the document class.
19164 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
19165 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19171 ey are described in the
19174 \begin_inset space ~
19182 \begin_layout Section
19184 \begin_inset Index idx
19187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19194 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19196 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
19203 \begin_layout Standard
19204 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
19206 When you insert a margin note via the menu
19208 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19210 \begin_inset space ~
19215 or the toolbar button
19218 arg "marginalnote-insert"
19237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19244 appearing within your text.
19245 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19246 's representation of your margin
19255 \begin_layout Standard
19256 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
19260 \begin_inset Marginal
19263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19265 This is a marginal note.
19273 \begin_layout Standard
19274 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
19275 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
19276 pages, right on odd pages.
19279 \begin_layout Standard
19280 For further information about marginal notes see the section
19283 \begin_inset space ~
19291 \begin_inset space ~
19299 \begin_layout Section
19300 Graphics and Images
19301 \begin_inset Index idx
19304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19311 \begin_inset Index idx
19314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19321 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19323 name "sec:Graphics"
19330 \begin_layout Standard
19331 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
19332 you want and click on the toolbar icon
19335 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
19340 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19344 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
19347 \begin_layout Standard
19348 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
19353 tab allows you to choose your image file.
19354 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
19356 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
19357 \begin_inset space ~
19361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19363 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
19370 \begin_layout Standard
19375 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
19376 of the image in the output.
19377 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
19381 \begin_inset space ~
19385 \begin_inset space ~
19394 \begin_inset space ~
19398 \begin_inset space ~
19402 \begin_inset space ~
19407 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
19408 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
19416 \begin_layout Standard
19420 \begin_inset space ~
19424 \begin_inset space ~
19429 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
19430 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
19432 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
19437 \begin_inset space ~
19442 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
19443 with the image size is printed.
19446 \begin_layout Standard
19447 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
19448 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
19450 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
19453 \begin_layout Standard
19455 \begin_inset Graphics
19456 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
19464 \begin_layout Standard
19465 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
19466 the image into a float, see section
19467 \begin_inset space ~
19471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19473 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
19480 \begin_layout Subsection
19482 \begin_inset Index idx
19485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19492 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19494 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
19501 \begin_layout Standard
19502 You can insert images in any known file format.
19503 But as we explained in section
19504 \begin_inset space ~
19508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19510 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19514 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
19516 therefore uses the program
19520 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
19521 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
19522 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
19523 \begin_inset space ~
19527 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19529 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19536 \begin_layout Standard
19537 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
19540 \begin_layout Description
19542 \begin_inset space ~
19545 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
19546 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
19547 Well-known bitmap image formats are
19548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19551 Graphics Interchange Format
19552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19555 (GIF, file extension
19556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19568 \begin_inset Index idx
19571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19603 Portable Network Graphics
19604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19607 (PNG, file extension
19608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19620 \begin_inset Index idx
19623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19655 Joint Photographic Experts Group
19656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19659 (JPG, file extension
19660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19684 \begin_inset Index idx
19687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19718 \begin_layout Description
19720 \begin_inset space ~
19723 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
19725 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
19726 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
19727 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
19728 \begin_inset Newline newline
19731 Scalable image formats can be
19732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19735 Scalable Vector Graphics
19736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19739 (SVG, file extension
19740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19752 \begin_inset Index idx
19755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19787 Encapsulated PostScript
19788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19791 (EPS, file extension
19792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19804 \begin_inset Index idx
19807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19839 Portable Document Format
19840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19843 (PDF, file extension
19844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19856 \begin_inset Index idx
19859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19874 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
19875 result will not be scalable.
19876 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
19881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19882 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
19890 \begin_layout Standard
19891 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
19898 \begin_layout Subsection
19899 Grouping of Image Settings
19900 \begin_inset Index idx
19903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19904 Images ! Settings grouping
19912 \begin_layout Standard
19913 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
19915 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
19916 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
19918 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
19919 need to manually change each of them.
19923 \begin_layout Standard
19924 A new group can be set by pressing the button
19927 \begin_inset space ~
19931 \begin_inset space ~
19943 \begin_inset space ~
19947 \begin_inset space ~
19953 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
19954 and checking the name of the desired group.
19957 \begin_layout Section
19959 \begin_inset Index idx
19962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19969 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19978 \begin_layout Standard
19979 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
19982 arg "tabular-insert"
19987 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19991 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
19992 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
19993 from the rest of the table.
19994 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
19995 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
19997 Here is an example table:
20000 \begin_layout Standard
20002 \begin_inset Tabular
20003 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
20004 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20005 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20006 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20007 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20008 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20208 \begin_layout Subsection
20212 \begin_layout Standard
20213 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
20216 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
20220 This brings up the table dialog.
20221 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
20222 cursor is placed currently.
20223 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
20224 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
20225 done on all of your selection.
20228 \begin_layout Standard
20229 In addition to the table dialog, the
20232 \begin_inset space ~
20237 helps you in setting table properties.
20238 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
20241 \begin_layout Standard
20245 \begin_inset space ~
20250 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
20251 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
20252 current cell respectively.
20253 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
20255 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
20256 of text, see section
20257 \begin_inset space ~
20261 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20263 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
20270 \begin_layout Standard
20271 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
20272 using the check box
20281 This will merge the cells to
20285 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
20286 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
20287 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
20288 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
20289 in the last row without the upper border:
20292 \begin_layout Standard
20294 \begin_inset Tabular
20295 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
20296 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
20297 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20298 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
20299 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20300 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20311 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20320 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20396 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20431 \begin_layout Standard
20432 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20433 -arguments for the table.
20434 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
20435 explained in the chapter
20442 \begin_inset space ~
20448 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
20449 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
20450 but are visible in the output.
20453 \begin_layout Standard
20454 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20462 Most DVI-viewers are
20466 able to display rotations.
20474 \begin_layout Standard
20479 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
20484 adds lines for all cell borders.
20487 \begin_layout Subsection
20489 \begin_inset Index idx
20492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20493 Tables ! Multi-page
20499 \begin_inset Index idx
20502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20511 \begin_layout Standard
20512 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
20515 \begin_inset space ~
20519 \begin_inset space ~
20527 \begin_inset space ~
20532 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
20533 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
20536 \begin_layout Description
20541 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20542 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
20543 Except for the first page, if
20546 \begin_inset space ~
20554 \begin_layout Description
20558 \begin_inset space ~
20563 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20564 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
20567 \begin_layout Description
20572 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20573 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
20574 except for the last page, if
20577 \begin_inset space ~
20585 \begin_layout Description
20589 \begin_inset space ~
20594 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20595 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
20598 \begin_layout Description
20599 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
20600 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
20602 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20606 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
20609 \begin_inset space ~
20617 \begin_layout Standard
20618 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
20619 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
20620 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
20626 In this context, first means first in this order:
20629 \begin_inset space ~
20641 \begin_inset space ~
20646 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
20649 \begin_layout Standard
20651 \begin_inset Tabular
20652 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
20653 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
20654 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
20655 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20656 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20657 <row endfirsthead="true">
20658 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20664 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
20669 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20678 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20688 <row endfirsthead="true">
20689 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20700 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20709 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20721 <row endhead="true">
20722 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20733 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20742 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20752 <row endhead="true">
20753 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20764 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20773 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20785 <row endfoot="true">
20786 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20797 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20806 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20837 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21778 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21787 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21796 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21807 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21838 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21869 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21900 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21931 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21962 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21993 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22024 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22055 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22086 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22117 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22148 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22179 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22210 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22241 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22272 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22303 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22334 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22365 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22396 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22427 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22458 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22489 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22520 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22551 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22582 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22613 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22644 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22675 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22706 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22737 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22767 <row endlastfoot="true">
22768 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22779 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22788 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22805 \begin_layout Subsection
22807 \begin_inset Index idx
22810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22817 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22819 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
22826 \begin_layout Standard
22827 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
22828 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
22829 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
22830 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
22834 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
22837 \begin_layout Standard
22838 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
22839 for the column in the table dialog.
22840 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
22841 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
22845 \begin_layout Standard
22847 \begin_inset Tabular
22848 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
22849 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22850 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22851 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
22852 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22872 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22941 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22997 This is longer now.
23002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23053 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
23054 This is longer now.
23059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23085 \begin_layout Standard
23086 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
23087 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
23091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23092 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
23093 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
23099 Selection with the mouse or with
23103 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
23104 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
23105 the selection from outside the table.
23108 \begin_layout Section
23110 \begin_inset Index idx
23113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23120 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23129 \begin_layout Subsection
23133 \begin_layout Standard
23134 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
23135 have a fixed location.
23137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23144 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
23152 \begin_inset space ~
23157 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
23158 too many notes on the current page.
23161 \begin_layout Standard
23162 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
23163 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
23164 and pages without text.
23165 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
23166 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
23167 Floats are therefore numbered.
23168 Referencing is described in section
23169 \begin_inset space ~
23173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23175 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23182 \begin_layout Standard
23183 To insert a float, use the menu
23185 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23189 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
23190 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
23192 After the label you can insert the caption text.
23193 \begin_inset Index idx
23196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23202 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
23203 paragraph within the float.
23204 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
23205 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
23206 left-clicking on the box label.
23207 A closed float box looks like this:
23208 \begin_inset Graphics
23209 filename clipart/float.png
23214 – a gray button with a red label.
23217 \begin_layout Standard
23218 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
23220 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
23223 \begin_layout Subsection
23225 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23227 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
23232 \begin_inset Index idx
23235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23236 Floats ! Figure floats
23244 \begin_layout Standard
23246 \begin_inset space ~
23250 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23252 reference "fig:A-star-in"
23256 was created using the menu
23258 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23259 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23265 arg "float-insert figure"
23269 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
23272 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23278 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
23282 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
23283 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
23285 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23287 \begin_inset space ~
23295 arg "layout-paragraph"
23301 \begin_layout Standard
23302 \begin_inset Float figure
23307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23309 \begin_inset Graphics
23310 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
23319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23320 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23323 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23325 name "fig:A-star-in"
23342 \begin_layout Standard
23343 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
23344 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
23346 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23355 ) and refer to it using the menu
23357 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23363 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
23367 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
23368 vague references like
23369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23376 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
23377 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
23379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23387 For more about cross-references, see section
23388 \begin_inset space ~
23392 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23394 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23401 \begin_layout Standard
23402 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
23403 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
23404 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
23405 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
23406 as described in section
23407 \begin_inset space ~
23411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23413 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
23419 \begin_inset space ~
23423 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23425 reference "fig:Two-images"
23429 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
23430 You can also set the images one below the other.
23432 \begin_inset space ~
23436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23438 reference "fig:Undefinable"
23443 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23445 reference "fig:Star"
23449 are the subfigures.
23452 \begin_layout Standard
23453 \begin_inset Float figure
23458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23459 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23463 \begin_inset Float figure
23468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23469 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23472 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23474 name "fig:Undefinable"
23486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23487 \begin_inset Graphics
23488 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
23500 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23504 \begin_inset Float figure
23509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23510 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23513 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23528 \begin_inset Graphics
23529 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
23541 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23548 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23551 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23553 name "fig:Two-images"
23570 \begin_layout Subsection
23572 \begin_inset Index idx
23575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23576 Floats ! Table floats
23584 \begin_layout Standard
23585 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
23587 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23588 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23591 or the toolbar button
23594 arg "float-insert table"
23598 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
23599 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
23600 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
23602 \begin_inset space ~
23606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23608 reference "tab:Table-float"
23615 \begin_layout Standard
23616 \begin_inset Float table
23621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23622 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23625 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23627 name "tab:Table-float"
23639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23641 \begin_inset Tabular
23642 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
23643 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23644 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23645 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23646 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23773 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
23781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23794 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23797 \end{array}\right]$
23805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23818 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
23839 \begin_layout Subsection
23841 \begin_inset Index idx
23844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23853 \begin_layout Standard
23855 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
23856 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
23857 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
23859 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
23867 \begin_inset space ~
23875 \begin_layout Section
23877 \begin_inset Index idx
23880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23889 \begin_layout Standard
23891 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
23893 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
23894 \begin_inset space \space{}
23901 \begin_layout Standard
23902 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
23903 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
23905 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23909 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
23910 and its alignment within the page.
23913 \begin_layout Standard
23915 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23925 height_special "totalheight"
23930 backgroundcolor "none"
23933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23936 This is a minipage.
23937 The text is set in an italic style.
23940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23943 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
23944 another formatting.
23952 \begin_layout Standard
23953 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23956 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
23960 as described in section
23961 \begin_inset space ~
23965 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23967 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
23972 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23978 \begin_layout Standard
23979 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23989 height_special "totalheight"
23994 backgroundcolor "none"
23997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23998 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23999 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
24005 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24009 \begin_inset Box Frameless
24019 height_special "totalheight"
24024 backgroundcolor "none"
24027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24028 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
24029 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
24037 \begin_layout Standard
24038 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24044 \begin_layout Standard
24045 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
24047 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
24054 \begin_inset space ~
24062 \begin_layout Chapter
24063 Mathematical Formulas
24064 \begin_inset Index idx
24067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24074 \begin_inset Index idx
24077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24106 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24108 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
24115 \begin_layout Standard
24116 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
24121 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
24124 \begin_layout Section
24126 \begin_inset Index idx
24129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24138 \begin_layout Standard
24139 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
24152 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
24154 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
24155 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
24156 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
24158 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24164 \begin_layout Standard
24165 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
24169 \begin_inset space ~
24174 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
24177 \begin_layout Standard
24178 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
24179 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
24182 \begin_layout Standard
24183 This is a line with an inline formula
24184 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
24190 \begin_layout Standard
24191 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
24192 paragraph, like this one:
24193 \begin_inset Formula
24200 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
24203 \begin_layout Standard
24205 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
24207 For example, typing
24208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24221 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
24222 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
24226 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
24229 \begin_inset space ~
24237 \begin_layout Subsection
24238 Navigating in Formulas
24239 \begin_inset Index idx
24242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24251 \begin_layout Standard
24252 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
24253 achieved with the arrow keys.
24255 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
24256 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
24261 will leave a formula construct (a square root
24262 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
24266 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
24270 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24273 \end{array}\right]$
24281 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
24286 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
24287 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
24290 \begin_layout Standard
24295 , printed in this document as
24296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24300 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24307 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
24308 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
24309 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
24314 For example, if you want
24315 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
24323 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24333 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24337 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24342 , since in the latter case only the
24345 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
24350 will be under the square root sign:
24351 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
24357 \begin_layout Standard
24358 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
24360 \begin_inset Formula
24362 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24371 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
24372 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
24375 \begin_layout Subsection
24379 \begin_layout Standard
24380 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
24381 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
24385 and a cursor movement key to select text.
24386 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
24387 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
24388 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
24389 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
24393 \begin_layout Subsection
24394 Exponents and Subscripts
24395 \begin_inset Index idx
24398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24405 \begin_inset Index idx
24408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24417 \begin_layout Standard
24418 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
24421 arg "math-superscript"
24427 arg "math-subscript"
24430 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
24432 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
24435 , type in a formula
24438 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24448 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
24454 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
24458 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
24464 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24470 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
24472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24479 , you have to use an extra
24483 to separate the circumflex and the character.
24484 For example, if you want
24485 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
24491 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24497 Subscripts are similar: To get
24498 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
24504 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24512 \begin_layout Subsection
24514 \begin_inset Index idx
24517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24526 \begin_layout Standard
24527 Create a fraction either with the command
24533 or by using the icon
24536 arg "math-insert \\frac"
24542 \begin_inset space ~
24548 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
24549 The cursor is above the fraction line.
24550 To move it to the bottom, simply press
24555 To move back up, press
24560 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
24561 \begin_inset Formula
24563 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
24566 \end{array}\right)}\right]
24574 \begin_layout Subsection
24576 \begin_inset Index idx
24579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24588 \begin_layout Standard
24589 Roots can be created using the
24592 \begin_inset space ~
24600 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
24606 arg "math-insert \\root"
24628 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
24634 always produces a square root.
24637 \begin_layout Subsection
24638 Operators with Limits
24639 \begin_inset Index idx
24642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24649 \begin_inset Index idx
24652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24659 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24661 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24668 \begin_layout Standard
24670 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
24674 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
24677 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
24678 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24679 by entering them as you would enter a super-
24680 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
24681 The sum operator will automatically place its
24682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24689 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
24691 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
24695 \begin_inset Formula
24697 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
24702 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
24706 \begin_layout Standard
24707 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
24709 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
24710 behind the operator and using the menu
24712 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24713 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24715 \begin_inset space ~
24719 \begin_inset space ~
24733 \begin_layout Standard
24734 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
24735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24743 \begin_inset Index idx
24746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24753 \begin_inset Formula
24755 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
24760 which will place the
24761 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
24765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24773 In inline formulas it looks like this:
24774 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
24780 \begin_layout Standard
24781 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
24788 Have a look at section
24789 \begin_inset space ~
24793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24795 reference "subsec:Functions"
24799 for an explanation of function macros.
24802 \begin_layout Subsection
24804 \begin_inset Index idx
24807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24816 \begin_layout Standard
24817 Most math symbols can be found in the
24820 \begin_inset space ~
24825 under one of several categories; including
24842 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
24846 \begin_layout Standard
24847 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24848 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
24849 don't have to use the
24852 \begin_inset space ~
24857 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
24859 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
24862 \begin_layout Subsection
24864 \begin_inset Index idx
24867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24876 \begin_layout Standard
24877 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
24883 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
24889 \begin_inset space ~
24897 arg "math-insert \\space"
24901 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
24902 For example, the sequence
24907 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
24910 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24912 \begin_inset Graphics
24913 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
24918 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
24919 the space marker and enter space again several times.
24920 With every space enter the size will be changed.
24921 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
24922 , because they are negative
24924 Here are two examples:
24927 \begin_layout Standard
24937 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
24943 \begin_layout Standard
24953 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
24959 \begin_layout Subsection
24961 \begin_inset Index idx
24964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24971 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24973 name "subsec:Functions"
24980 \begin_layout Standard
24984 \begin_inset space ~
24989 contains under the button
24992 arg "math-insert \\functions"
24995 a number of function macros, such as
24996 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
25000 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
25008 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
25015 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
25016 avoid confusions, because
25017 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
25021 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
25027 \begin_layout Standard
25028 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
25030 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
25034 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
25040 \begin_layout Standard
25041 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
25042 are placed, as described in section
25043 \begin_inset space ~
25047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25049 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
25056 \begin_layout Subsection
25058 \begin_inset Index idx
25061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25070 \begin_layout Standard
25071 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
25073 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
25074 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
25075 commands, for example, to enter
25076 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25079 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
25080 Our example is entered by typing
25085 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25092 \begin_inset space ~
25096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25098 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
25102 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
25105 \begin_layout Standard
25106 \begin_inset Float table
25111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25112 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25115 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25117 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
25121 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
25129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25131 \begin_inset Tabular
25132 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
25133 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25134 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25135 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25136 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25220 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25274 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
25284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25328 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
25338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25382 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
25392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25436 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
25446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25490 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
25500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25544 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
25554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25598 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
25608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25652 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
25662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25697 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
25718 \begin_layout Standard
25719 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
25722 \begin_inset space ~
25730 arg "math-insert \\hat"
25733 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
25737 \begin_layout Section
25738 Brackets and Delimiters
25739 \begin_inset Index idx
25742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25749 \begin_inset Index idx
25752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25759 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25761 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25768 \begin_layout Standard
25769 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
25771 For some purposes, using just the keys
25776 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
25777 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
25778 toolbar delimiter icon
25781 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25785 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
25786 \begin_inset Formula
25788 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
25796 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
25797 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
25801 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25804 and the expression on the right was entered using the
25810 \begin_inset Formula
25812 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
25820 \begin_layout Standard
25821 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
25822 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
25826 \begin_layout Standard
25827 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
25828 left side and right side.
25829 If you use the option
25832 \begin_inset space ~
25837 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
25838 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
25840 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
25845 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
25846 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
25849 \begin_layout Standard
25850 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
25851 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
25852 is to go inside the brackets.
25853 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
25858 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
25859 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
25860 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
25864 arg "math-delim ( )"
25870 \begin_layout Section
25871 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
25872 \begin_inset Index idx
25875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25882 \begin_inset Index idx
25885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25892 \begin_inset Index idx
25895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25896 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25904 \begin_layout Standard
25905 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25909 \begin_inset space ~
25917 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
25921 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
25922 Here is an example:
25923 \begin_inset Formula
25925 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25934 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
25935 \begin_inset space ~
25939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25941 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25946 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
25947 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
25948 This alignment is set in the box
25953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26002 for every column as default.
26003 For example, the sequence
26004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26015 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
26016 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
26017 corresponds to the relevant column.
26018 The result will look like this:
26019 \begin_inset Formula
26022 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
26023 column & has & has\,right\\
26024 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
26033 \begin_layout Standard
26034 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
26037 arg "newline-insert newline"
26040 while the cursor is in the matrix.
26041 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
26043 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26046 or the math toolbar.
26049 \begin_layout Standard
26050 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
26051 It can be created with the menu
26053 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26054 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26056 \begin_inset space ~
26068 Here is an example:
26069 \begin_inset Formula
26083 \begin_layout Standard
26084 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26087 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
26090 arg "newline-insert newline"
26094 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
26099 arg "newline-insert newline"
26102 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
26103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26110 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
26111 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
26112 A new row is created by every further entry of
26115 arg "newline-insert newline"
26119 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
26120 Here is an example:
26121 \begin_inset Formula
26123 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
26124 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
26129 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
26130 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
26131 \begin_inset Formula
26133 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
26141 \begin_layout Standard
26142 The multi-line formula type described here is called
26149 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
26150 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
26151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26153 reference "eq:asquared"
26158 The other types are described in section
26159 \begin_inset space ~
26163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26165 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26172 \begin_layout Section
26173 Formula Numbering and Referencing
26174 \begin_inset Index idx
26177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26178 Math ! Formula numbering
26184 \begin_inset Index idx
26187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26188 Math ! Referencing formulas
26194 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26196 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26203 \begin_layout Standard
26204 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
26206 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26207 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26209 \begin_inset space ~
26213 \begin_inset space ~
26221 arg "math-number-toggle"
26225 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26226 within parentheses.
26227 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
26228 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
26229 the document class.
26230 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
26231 separated by a dot:
26232 \begin_inset Formula
26242 arg "math-number-toggle"
26245 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
26246 You can only number displayed formulas.
26249 \begin_layout Standard
26250 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
26252 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26253 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26255 \begin_inset space ~
26259 \begin_inset space ~
26267 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
26270 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
26271 \begin_inset Formula
26274 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
26280 To number all lines use the shortcut
26283 arg "math-number-toggle"
26289 \begin_layout Standard
26290 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26293 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
26294 A label is inserted with the menu
26296 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26305 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
26306 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
26307 It is recommended that you use the suggested
26308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26319 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
26320 label type when you have many labels in your document.
26321 We inserted in the following example the label
26322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26329 in the second line:
26330 \begin_inset Formula
26332 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
26333 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
26338 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
26339 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
26340 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
26342 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26344 \begin_inset space ~
26352 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26356 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
26357 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26358 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
26359 as the formula number:
26362 \begin_layout Standard
26363 This is a cross-reference to equation (
26364 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26366 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26373 \begin_layout Standard
26374 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
26375 's cross-reference box are described in section
26376 \begin_inset space ~
26380 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26382 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26387 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
26395 \begin_layout Section
26396 User defined math macros
26397 \begin_inset Index idx
26400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26409 \begin_layout Standard
26411 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
26412 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
26413 Math macros are explained in section
26416 \begin_inset space ~
26428 \begin_layout Section
26432 \begin_layout Subsection
26434 \begin_inset Index idx
26437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26446 \begin_layout Standard
26447 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
26448 To set a font in a formula, use the
26451 \begin_inset space ~
26459 arg "math-insert \\font"
26462 , or enter its command, listed in table
26463 \begin_inset space ~
26467 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26469 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26476 \begin_layout Standard
26477 \begin_inset Float table
26482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26483 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26486 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26488 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26492 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
26500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26502 \begin_inset Tabular
26503 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
26504 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26505 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26506 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26538 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
26546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26565 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
26573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26592 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
26600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26625 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
26633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26652 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
26660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26679 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
26687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26713 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
26721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26740 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
26748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26774 \begin_layout Standard
26775 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26783 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
26799 \begin_layout Standard
26800 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
26801 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
26806 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
26807 space when you need a space in the box.
26808 Here is an example where
26809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26820 denotes the set of numbers:
26821 \begin_inset Formula
26823 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
26831 \begin_layout Standard
26832 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
26833 You can, for example, put a character in
26842 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
26846 \begin_inset Newline newline
26849 So it is better not to use this feature.
26852 \begin_layout Standard
26853 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
26854 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
26858 \begin_inset Newline newline
26861 You can only print them emboldened using the command
26867 , which works like the other typeface commands:
26868 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
26874 \begin_layout Standard
26881 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
26884 \begin_layout Standard
26885 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
26887 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26888 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26890 \begin_inset space ~
26898 \begin_layout Subsection
26900 \begin_inset Index idx
26903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26912 \begin_layout Standard
26913 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
26915 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
26919 \begin_inset space ~
26923 \begin_inset space ~
26931 \begin_inset space ~
26939 arg "math-insert \\font"
26943 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26944 in black instead of blue.
26945 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
26946 Here is an example:
26947 \begin_inset Formula
26950 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
26951 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
26960 \begin_layout Subsection
26962 \begin_inset Index idx
26965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26974 \begin_layout Standard
26975 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
26976 automatically chosen in most situations.
26994 For most characters,
27002 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
27003 and certain other structures, are set larger in
27008 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
27009 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
27010 thinks are appropriate.
27011 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
27014 arg "math-insert \\style"
27018 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
27019 For example, you can set
27020 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
27023 , which is normally in
27032 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
27036 The four styles are used in the following example:
27039 \begin_layout Standard
27040 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
27044 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
27048 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
27052 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
27058 \begin_layout Standard
27059 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
27060 is set in a particular size with the menu
27062 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27064 \begin_inset space ~
27069 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
27070 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
27071 will be adjusted to correspond.
27072 As an example here is a formula in the font size
27073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27083 \begin_layout Standard
27087 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
27093 \begin_layout Section
27094 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27096 \begin_inset Index idx
27099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27106 \begin_inset Index idx
27109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27118 \begin_layout Standard
27120 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
27121 that are in common use.
27124 \begin_layout Subsection
27125 Enabling AMS-Support
27128 \begin_layout Standard
27129 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
27130 the document by selecting the checkbox
27133 \begin_inset space ~
27137 \begin_inset space ~
27141 \begin_inset space ~
27148 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27152 \begin_inset Index idx
27155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27156 Document ! Settings
27164 \begin_inset space ~
27170 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27171 -errors in formulas,
27172 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
27175 \begin_layout Subsection
27177 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27179 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27184 \begin_inset Index idx
27187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27188 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27196 \begin_layout Standard
27197 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27198 provides a selection of different formula types.
27200 allows you to choose between
27221 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
27222 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27229 , for an explanation of these formula types.
27232 \begin_layout Chapter
27236 \begin_layout Section
27238 \begin_inset Index idx
27241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27248 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27250 name "sec:Cross-References"
27257 \begin_layout Standard
27258 One of \SpecialChar LyX
27259 's strengths is cross-references.
27260 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
27262 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
27263 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
27264 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
27267 \begin_layout Enumerate
27271 \begin_layout Enumerate
27272 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27274 name "enu:Second-item"
27281 \begin_layout Enumerate
27285 \begin_layout Standard
27286 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
27288 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27291 or by pressing the toolbar button
27298 A gray label box like this:
27299 \begin_inset Graphics
27300 filename clipart/label.png
27304 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
27306 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
27308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27341 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
27342 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
27344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27358 \begin_layout Standard
27359 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
27361 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27364 or the toolbar button
27367 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27371 A gray cross-reference box like this:
27372 \begin_inset Graphics
27373 filename clipart/reference.png
27377 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
27379 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
27380 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27392 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
27396 \begin_layout Standard
27397 As an alternative to
27399 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27402 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
27407 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
27408 to the actual cursor position via the menu
27410 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27422 \begin_layout Standard
27423 Here is our cross-reference: Item
27424 \begin_inset space ~
27428 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27430 reference "enu:Second-item"
27437 \begin_layout Standard
27438 It is recommended to use a protected space
27442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27443 described in section
27444 \begin_inset space ~
27448 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27450 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
27459 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
27460 line breaks between them.
27463 \begin_layout Standard
27464 There are eight formats of cross-references:
27467 \begin_layout Description
27468 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
27469 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27471 reference "fig:Two-images"
27478 \begin_layout Description
27479 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
27480 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
27482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27492 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27499 \begin_layout Description
27500 <page>: prints the page number: Page
27501 \begin_inset space ~
27505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27506 LatexCommand pageref
27507 reference "fig:Two-images"
27514 \begin_layout Description
27516 \begin_inset space ~
27520 \begin_inset space ~
27523 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
27524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27525 LatexCommand vpageref
27526 reference "fig:Two-images"
27531 \begin_inset Newline newline
27534 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
27535 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
27536 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
27537 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
27538 it prints “on the next page”.
27539 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
27542 \begin_layout Description
27544 \begin_inset space ~
27548 \begin_inset space ~
27552 \begin_inset space ~
27555 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
27556 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27558 reference "fig:Two-images"
27563 \begin_inset Newline newline
27566 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
27572 ; otherwise it behaves like
27576 \begin_inset space ~
27580 \begin_inset space ~
27589 \begin_layout Description
27591 \begin_inset space ~
27594 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
27595 \begin_inset Newline newline
27599 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27607 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27617 \begin_inset Index idx
27620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27622 packages ! prettyref
27628 \begin_inset Index idx
27631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27633 packages ! refstyle
27644 \begin_inset Newline newline
27647 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
27648 -package should be used for this feature by setting
27651 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
27655 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27656 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27664 is the default and preferred because
27668 supports only English documents.
27669 The format is specified by using the command
27681 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27682 preamble of the document.
27683 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
27685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27701 \begin_inset Newline newline
27708 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
27713 \begin_inset Newline newline
27724 predefines reference formats for all available types.
27725 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
27727 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
27728 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
27733 , you might do so as follows:
27734 \begin_inset Newline newline
27741 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
27746 \begin_inset Newline newline
27749 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
27750 the package documentation
27751 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27753 key "prettyref,refstyle"
27759 \begin_inset Newline newline
27770 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
27777 \begin_layout Description
27779 \begin_inset space ~
27782 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
27783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27784 LatexCommand nameref
27785 reference "fig:Two-images"
27792 \begin_layout Description
27794 \begin_inset space ~
27797 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27798 label for the reference:
27799 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27800 LatexCommand labelonly
27801 reference "fig:Two-images"
27806 \begin_inset Newline newline
27809 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
27810 Code, if you want to issue a command
27811 that \SpecialChar LyX
27817 , then you may want to use the
27820 \begin_inset space ~
27825 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
27827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27835 This is the form needed for e.
27836 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27840 \begin_inset space \space{}
27847 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
27848 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
27850 The varieties are adjusted in the field
27854 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
27858 \begin_layout Standard
27859 You can only use the style
27863 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
27867 is always possible.
27870 \begin_layout Standard
27871 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
27872 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
27874 Referencing formulas is explained in section
27875 \begin_inset space ~
27879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27881 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27888 \begin_layout Standard
27889 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
27893 \begin_inset space ~
27897 \begin_inset space ~
27902 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
27903 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
27906 \begin_inset space ~
27911 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
27912 You can also go back with the toolbar button
27915 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
27921 \begin_layout Standard
27922 You can change labels at any time.
27923 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
27924 do not need to think about this.
27927 \begin_layout Standard
27928 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
27930 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
27934 \begin_layout Standard
27935 References are described in detail in the section
27936 \begin_inset space ~
27946 \begin_inset space ~
27954 \begin_layout Section
27955 Table of Contents and other Listings
27956 \begin_inset Index idx
27959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27966 \begin_inset Index idx
27969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27970 Navigating ! Outline
27976 \begin_inset Index idx
27979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27986 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27995 \begin_layout Subsection
27997 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27999 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
28006 \begin_layout Standard
28007 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
28009 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28010 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28012 \begin_inset space ~
28016 \begin_inset space ~
28022 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
28024 If you click on it, the
28028 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
28029 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
28030 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
28032 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
28034 \begin_inset space ~
28039 that is described in section
28040 \begin_inset space ~
28044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28046 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
28053 \begin_layout Standard
28054 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
28055 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
28057 \begin_inset space ~
28061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28063 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
28067 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
28069 \begin_inset space ~
28073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28075 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
28079 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
28081 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
28084 \begin_layout Subsection
28085 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
28086 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28088 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
28095 \begin_layout Standard
28096 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
28098 You can insert them via the
28100 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28104 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
28107 \begin_layout Section
28108 URLs and Hyperlinks
28109 \begin_inset Index idx
28112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28119 \begin_inset Index idx
28122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28131 \begin_layout Subsection
28133 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28142 \begin_layout Standard
28143 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
28145 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28151 \begin_layout Standard
28152 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
28154 \begin_inset Flex URL
28157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28159 https://www.lyx.org
28167 \begin_layout Standard
28168 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
28174 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
28178 \begin_layout Standard
28179 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28187 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28196 \begin_layout Subsection
28198 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28200 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
28207 \begin_layout Standard
28208 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
28210 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28213 or with the toolbar button
28220 The appearing dialog has two fields:
28229 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
28230 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
28231 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28233 name "LyX's homepage"
28234 target "https://www.lyx.org"
28239 , an Email address like this:
28240 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28242 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
28243 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
28249 , or a link to a file.
28254 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
28262 \begin_layout Standard
28263 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
28265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28276 to the link target.
28279 \begin_layout Standard
28280 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
28281 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
28282 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
28283 the text style dialog.
28284 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
28288 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28290 name "LyX's homepage"
28291 target "https://www.lyx.org"
28299 \begin_layout Standard
28300 The link text color can be changed, when the option
28304 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
28306 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28307 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28311 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
28313 \begin_inset Newline newline
28321 \begin_inset Newline newline
28328 in the PDF Properties dialog.
28331 \begin_layout Section
28333 \begin_inset Index idx
28336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28343 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28345 name "sec:Appendices"
28352 \begin_layout Standard
28353 Appendices are created with the menu
28355 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28357 \begin_inset space ~
28361 \begin_inset space ~
28367 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
28368 as the appendix part of the book.
28369 This part is marked with a red borderline.
28372 \begin_layout Standard
28373 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
28374 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
28375 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
28376 and the subsection number.
28377 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
28381 \begin_layout Standard
28383 \begin_inset space ~
28387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28389 reference "chap:Credits"
28394 \begin_inset space ~
28398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28400 reference "subsec:Export"
28407 \begin_layout Section
28409 \begin_inset Index idx
28412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28419 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28421 name "sec:Bibliography"
28428 \begin_layout Standard
28429 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
28431 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
28432 \begin_inset space ~
28436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28438 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28445 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
28450 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
28451 \begin_inset space ~
28455 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28457 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
28462 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
28463 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
28464 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
28468 using a bibliography database.
28471 \begin_layout Standard
28472 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
28473 use two bibliographies in this document, a
28477 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
28478 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28479 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28480 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
28481 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
28484 \begin_layout Subsection
28485 The Bibliography Environment
28486 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28488 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
28495 \begin_layout Standard
28500 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
28502 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
28511 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
28513 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
28514 of ASCII characters only.
28518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28520 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28523 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
28529 \begin_inset Newline newline
28533 \begin_inset Flex URL
28536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28538 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII
28550 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
28553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28560 , a short form of its title, as the key.
28561 \begin_inset Newline newline
28568 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
28569 the number of the entry.
28574 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
28583 \begin_layout Standard
28584 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
28586 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28589 or the toolbar button
28592 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
28596 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
28597 containing the available citations.
28598 Select one or more keys from the list and
28608 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
28609 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
28613 \begin_layout Standard
28614 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
28615 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
28616 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
28618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28628 \begin_layout Standard
28632 Companion Second Edition
28635 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28637 key "latexcompanion"
28645 \begin_layout Standard
28646 The \SpecialChar LyX
28647 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
28648 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28658 \begin_layout Standard
28659 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28666 \begin_inset Index idx
28669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28677 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
28678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28689 Author A and Author B(Year)
28690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28697 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
28699 Then, if you select
28702 \begin_inset space ~
28707 in the document settings
28708 \begin_inset Index idx
28711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28712 Document ! Settings
28719 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
28721 \begin_inset space ~
28727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28729 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
28736 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
28739 \begin_layout Standard
28740 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
28743 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28745 \begin_inset space ~
28753 arg "layout-paragraph"
28757 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
28760 \begin_layout Subsection
28761 Bibliography databases
28762 \begin_inset Index idx
28765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28766 Bibliography ! Databases
28772 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28774 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28781 \begin_layout Standard
28782 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
28787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28788 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
28790 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
28791 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
28796 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
28798 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
28799 your working field in a database.
28800 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
28801 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
28802 list for that document.
28803 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
28807 \begin_layout Standard
28808 The database is a text file with the file extension
28809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28820 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
28821 The format is explained in
28822 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28829 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28831 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28833 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
28839 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
28840 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
28841 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
28843 \begin_inset Flex URL
28846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28848 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
28856 \begin_layout Standard
28858 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
28859 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28860 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
28862 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
28864 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
28865 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
28866 Those are addressed by
28871 \begin_inset Index idx
28874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28876 packages ! biblatex
28882 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28883 (although it has been significantly
28884 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28894 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28895 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28896 might conversely fail to correctly
28897 handle databases that use specific
28906 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
28910 \begin_layout Standard
28911 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28916 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
28918 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28922 \begin_inset Index idx
28925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28926 Document ! Settings
28938 \begin_inset space ~
28943 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28951 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28952 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28954 \begin_inset Index idx
28957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28958 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28967 \begin_layout Standard
28968 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28971 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28976 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28978 \begin_inset space ~
28984 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
28985 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28993 Add bibliography to TOC
28995 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
29000 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
29001 in the document or just the cited references.
29004 \begin_layout Standard
29005 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29006 style file is a text file with the file extension
29007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29018 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
29019 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29020 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
29021 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
29023 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
29028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29029 For information on how this is done, have a look at
29030 \begin_inset Newline newline
29034 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29036 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
29046 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29051 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
29055 \begin_layout Standard
29056 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
29059 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29061 \begin_inset Index idx
29064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29065 Bibliography ! Biblatex
29071 \begin_inset Index idx
29074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29076 packages ! biblatex
29084 \begin_layout Standard
29085 Accessing a database via
29089 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29092 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29097 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29099 \begin_inset space ~
29105 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29106 you cannot select a
29111 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29115 \begin_layout Standard
29120 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
29122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29133 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
29134 file (text file with the file extension
29135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29146 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
29147 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
29149 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
29153 \begin_layout Standard
29158 styles are not set in the
29161 \begin_inset space ~
29166 dialog, but in the document settings.
29167 \begin_inset Index idx
29170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29171 Document ! Settings
29176 However, in the dialog in the
29180 field, which is only visible if you use
29184 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
29185 example how its heading will appear).
29186 These options are deescribed in detail in the
29191 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29201 \begin_layout Standard
29202 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
29203 \begin_inset space ~
29207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29209 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29219 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29220 Bibliography Processors
29223 \begin_layout Standard
29224 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
29225 uses a bibliography processor,
29226 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
29227 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
29228 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29230 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
29231 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
29234 \begin_layout Standard
29235 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
29237 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
29238 You can do this on a general level in
29240 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29241 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29242 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29245 or for individual documents in
29247 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29248 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29252 The following variants are available by default:
29255 \begin_layout Description
29256 biber a specific, modern processor
29257 \begin_inset Index idx
29260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29267 developed exclusively for
29271 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29277 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
29282 makes use of; if you use the
29286 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
29293 \begin_layout Description
29294 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
29295 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
29296 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
29300 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
29303 \begin_layout Description
29304 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
29305 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
29309 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
29313 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
29317 features are supported.
29320 \begin_layout Standard
29321 By default (with the
29327 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29328 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29341 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29342 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29343 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29346 ), \SpecialChar LyX
29347 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
29360 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29361 -based bibliography styles).
29362 This should suit most needs.
29365 \begin_layout Standard
29366 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
29367 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
29368 (in \SpecialChar LyX
29373 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29374 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
29375 You can adjust it in
29377 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29378 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29379 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29385 \begin_layout Standard
29386 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
29387 can add below the selection.
29388 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
29389 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29395 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29405 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29409 \begin_layout Standard
29411 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
29413 These are explained in detail in section
29415 Customizing Bibliographies
29419 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29424 Additional Features
29429 \begin_layout Subsection
29431 \begin_inset Index idx
29434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29435 Bibliography ! Citation format
29441 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29443 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
29450 \begin_layout Standard
29451 Many different citation formats are common, e.
29452 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29456 \begin_inset space \space{}
29459 numerical citation (as
29460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29467 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
29468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29475 ) or author-year citations (as
29476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29485 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
29489 \begin_layout Standard
29490 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
29493 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29494 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29498 \begin_inset Index idx
29501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29502 Document ! Settings
29507 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
29513 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
29514 labels, is there to use
29517 \begin_inset space ~
29528 \begin_inset space ~
29533 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
29534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29536 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29543 \begin_layout Standard
29544 With a bibliography database (see
29545 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29547 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29554 ) one has in contrary to the
29558 environment full access to the formatting styles.
29559 These style formats are available:
29562 \begin_layout Description
29564 \begin_inset space ~
29567 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29568 -based approached without any additional packages
29569 (simple numeric citations).
29572 \begin_layout Description
29573 Biblatex loads the package
29578 \begin_inset Index idx
29581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29583 packages ! biblatex
29588 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
29590 Biblatex citation style
29594 Biblatex bibliography style
29597 Options to the package
29601 can be entered in the
29608 \begin_layout Description
29610 \begin_inset space ~
29614 \begin_inset space ~
29617 mode) loads the package
29621 with the natbib compatibility mode.
29622 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
29634 behavior very closely.
29639 this option has some additional styles.
29644 styles are also supported by this variant.
29647 \begin_layout Description
29649 \begin_inset space ~
29652 (BibTeX) loads the package
29657 \begin_inset Index idx
29660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29667 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
29670 \begin_layout Description
29672 \begin_inset space ~
29675 (BibTeX) loads the package
29680 \begin_inset Index idx
29683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29690 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
29693 \begin_layout Standard
29702 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
29704 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
29713 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
29715 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
29716 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
29718 Biblatex citation style
29721 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
29727 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
29731 \begin_layout Standard
29732 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
29733 are available in the
29738 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
29739 a name prefix such as
29740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29755 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
29756 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29760 \begin_inset space \space{}
29764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29775 \begin_layout Standard
29776 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
29778 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29782 \begin_inset space \space{}
29785 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
29787 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29791 \begin_inset space \space{}
29795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29807 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29811 \begin_inset space ~
29819 \begin_inset space ~
29825 Here is a simple example where the text
29826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29830 \begin_inset space ~
29834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29837 appears after the reference:
29840 \begin_layout Quote
29842 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29845 key "latexcompanion"
29853 \begin_layout Standard
29854 All styles except for
29858 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
29860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29868 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
29872 \begin_layout Standard
29873 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
29874 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
29875 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
29880 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
29881 multi-citation (so-called
29882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29885 qualified citation lists
29886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29892 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
29897 dialog will display three columns in the field
29904 \begin_inset space ~
29912 \begin_inset space ~
29920 \begin_inset space ~
29926 If you double-click on an item's
29929 \begin_inset space ~
29937 \begin_inset space ~
29942 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
29945 General text before
29951 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
29954 \begin_layout Section
29956 \begin_inset Index idx
29959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29966 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29975 \begin_layout Standard
29976 An index entry is created if you use the menu
29978 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29980 \begin_inset space ~
29985 or the toolbar button
29992 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
29993 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
29994 by \SpecialChar LyX
29995 as the index entry.
29998 \begin_layout Standard
29999 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
30001 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30002 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30004 \begin_inset space ~
30010 A light blue box labeled
30011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30022 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
30023 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
30027 \begin_layout Standard
30028 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
30029 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30030 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
30031 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30033 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30035 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
30043 \begin_layout Subsection
30044 Grouping Index Entries
30045 \begin_inset Index idx
30048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30057 \begin_layout Standard
30058 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
30060 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
30061 lists under the entry
30062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30070 First we create the entry
30071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30079 \begin_inset space ~
30083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30085 reference "subsec:Lists"
30090 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
30091 \begin_inset space ~
30095 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30097 reference "sec:Itemize"
30101 , we insert the command
30104 \begin_layout Standard
30110 \begin_layout Standard
30114 \begin_layout Standard
30120 \begin_layout Standard
30121 for the enumerated list in section
30122 \begin_inset space ~
30126 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30128 reference "sec:Enumerate"
30135 \begin_layout Standard
30136 The exclamation mark
30137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30144 marks the grouping levels.
30145 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
30146 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
30147 If we don't have an index entry for
30148 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30155 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
30158 \begin_layout Subsection
30160 \begin_inset Index idx
30163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30164 Index ! Page ranges
30172 \begin_layout Standard
30173 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
30175 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
30176 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
30177 an index entry in section
30178 \begin_inset space ~
30182 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30184 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
30191 \begin_layout Standard
30194 Paragraph environments|(
30197 \begin_layout Standard
30198 and another entry at the end of section
30199 \begin_inset space ~
30203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30205 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
30212 \begin_layout Standard
30215 Paragraph environments|)
30218 \begin_layout Standard
30220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30243 respectively start and end the index range.
30244 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
30245 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
30246 the pages of the indexed document parts.
30247 An example is the index entry
30248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30251 Document ! Settings
30252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30258 \begin_layout Subsection
30260 \begin_inset Index idx
30263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30264 Index ! Cross referencing
30272 \begin_layout Standard
30273 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
30274 We referred for example in the index entry
30275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30283 \begin_inset space ~
30287 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30289 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
30293 ) to the index entry
30294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30301 in the same section using the entry
30304 \begin_layout Standard
30307 GIF|see{Image formats}
30310 \begin_layout Standard
30311 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
30313 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
30314 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
30317 \begin_layout Subsection
30319 \begin_inset Index idx
30322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30323 Index ! Entry order
30331 \begin_layout Standard
30332 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
30333 follow the rules for the index order.
30334 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
30339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30340 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
30342 \begin_inset space ~
30346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30348 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30357 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
30358 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
30359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30383 \begin_inset Index idx
30386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30387 Dummy entries ! maïs
30393 \begin_inset Index idx
30396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30397 Dummy entries ! maître
30403 \begin_inset Index idx
30406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30407 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
30412 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
30413 maïs, maison, maître.
30414 To achieve this, we use the command
30417 \begin_layout Standard
30420 previous entry@current entry
30423 \begin_layout Standard
30424 In our case we want to have
30425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30440 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
30443 \begin_layout Standard
30449 \begin_layout Standard
30450 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
30451 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
30453 See the next subsection for an example.
30456 \begin_layout Subsection
30458 \begin_inset Index idx
30461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30462 Index ! Entry layout
30470 \begin_layout Standard
30471 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
30472 \begin_inset Index idx
30475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30478 This is an italic dummy entry
30483 You can also format the page number using the character
30484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30491 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30492 -command without a backslash.
30493 We can write for example
30496 \begin_layout Standard
30499 italic page number:|textit
30502 \begin_layout Standard
30503 to get the page number in italic.
30504 \begin_inset Index idx
30507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30508 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
30513 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
30514 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
30516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30532 \begin_inset space ~
30538 Have a look at section
30539 \begin_inset space ~
30543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30545 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30549 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30553 \begin_layout Standard
30554 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30562 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
30566 to generate the index, see section
30567 \begin_inset space ~
30571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30573 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30582 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
30587 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
30588 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30591 key "latexcompanion"
30604 \begin_layout Standard
30605 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
30607 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
30608 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
30609 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
30610 If so, put the following in the preamble
30613 \begin_layout Standard
30625 \begin_layout Standard
30629 \begin_layout Standard
30635 \begin_layout Standard
30636 in the index entry.
30637 \begin_inset Index idx
30640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30641 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
30646 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
30647 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
30648 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
30651 \begin_layout Standard
30652 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
30653 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
30654 a bold font for all index entries.
30655 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
30667 documentation for details,
30668 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30670 key "makeindex,xindy"
30678 \begin_layout Subsection
30680 \begin_inset Index idx
30683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30690 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30692 name "subsec:Index-Program"
30699 \begin_layout Standard
30700 If the index generation program
30704 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
30705 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
30709 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
30710 distribution, is used.
30714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30719 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
30720 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
30721 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
30722 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
30723 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
30733 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
30735 dialog, see section
30736 \begin_inset space ~
30740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30742 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
30747 The available options are listed and explained in
30748 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30750 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
30756 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
30760 \begin_layout Standard
30761 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
30762 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
30765 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30766 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30770 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
30771 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
30774 \begin_layout Subsection
30778 \begin_layout Standard
30779 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
30780 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
30781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30785 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30788 next to the standard index.
30790 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
30791 that add this feature.
30798 \begin_inset Index idx
30801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30803 packages ! splitidx
30808 package to generate multiple indexes.
30809 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
30814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30815 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
30817 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30825 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30826 style, but it also includes
30827 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
30828 Please consult the package's manual for details.
30836 \begin_layout Standard
30837 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
30838 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
30840 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30841 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30844 and select the option
30846 Use multiple Indexes
30853 already contains the standard index
30854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30862 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
30863 also appear as a heading) to the
30867 input field and press the
30872 The new index now also appears in the list.
30873 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
30874 label color to the new index.
30877 \begin_layout Standard
30878 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
30881 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30888 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
30889 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
30890 are additional features:
30893 \begin_layout Itemize
30894 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
30895 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
30898 \begin_layout Itemize
30899 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
30900 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
30905 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
30906 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
30907 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
30908 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
30911 \begin_layout Itemize
30916 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
30917 code in the name of the index.
30920 \begin_layout Section
30921 Nomenclature/Glossary
30922 \begin_inset Index idx
30925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30932 \begin_inset Index idx
30935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30966 name "sec:Nomenclature"
30973 \begin_layout Standard
30974 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
30975 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
30976 called nomenclature or glossary.
30979 \begin_layout Standard
30980 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30987 \begin_inset Index idx
30990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30998 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31000 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31007 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31011 \begin_layout Standard
31012 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
31013 and then use the menu
31015 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31021 \begin_inset space ~
31026 or the toolbar button
31029 arg "nomencl-insert"
31034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31045 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
31048 \begin_layout Standard
31049 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
31050 The first is the term or
31054 that you wish to define.
31059 of the term or symbol.
31062 \begin_layout Standard
31063 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31071 To use \SpecialChar TeX
31072 code for nomenclature entries the option
31076 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
31084 \begin_layout Subsection
31085 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
31086 \begin_inset Index idx
31089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31090 Nomenclature ! Layout
31098 \begin_layout Standard
31099 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
31103 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
31106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31110 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31118 \begin_inset Newline newline
31126 \begin_inset Newline newline
31132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31139 character starts/ends the formula.
31140 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
31141 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
31143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31153 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
31163 \begin_layout Standard
31164 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31165 syntax is given in section
31166 \begin_inset space ~
31170 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31172 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31179 \begin_layout Standard
31183 \begin_inset space ~
31188 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
31190 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
31191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31195 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31202 in this document is:
31203 \begin_inset Newline newline
31208 dummy entry for the character
31213 \begin_inset Newline newline
31225 \begin_inset space ~
31235 font use the command
31264 \begin_layout Standard
31265 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
31266 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31270 \begin_inset space \space{}
31274 \begin_inset Newline newline
31290 \begin_inset Newline newline
31293 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
31294 This command will make the font of all symbols
31301 \begin_inset space ~
31309 \begin_layout Standard
31310 If the characters |
31311 \begin_inset space \space{}
31315 \begin_inset space \space{}
31319 \begin_inset space \space{}
31323 \begin_inset space \space{}
31327 \begin_inset space \space{}
31330 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
31331 code they need to be escaped
31332 by adding a quote character in front of them.
31333 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31334 LatexCommand nomenclature
31335 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
31336 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
31344 \begin_layout Subsection
31345 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
31346 \begin_inset Index idx
31349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31350 Nomenclature ! Sort order
31358 \begin_layout Standard
31359 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31360 -code of the symbol
31362 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
31364 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
31367 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31368 LatexCommand nomenclature
31370 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
31378 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31382 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31383 LatexCommand nomenclature
31386 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
31392 They will be sorted by
31393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31419 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31422 will be sorted before the
31426 since the character
31427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31434 is considered in sorting.
31437 \begin_layout Standard
31438 To control the sort order, you can edit the
31441 \begin_inset space ~
31446 field of the nomenclature dialog.
31447 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
31449 For the example given, you can insert
31453 in this field for the
31454 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31461 will be located before
31462 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31468 \begin_layout Standard
31469 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
31474 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31484 \begin_layout Subsection
31485 Nomenclature Options
31486 \begin_inset Index idx
31489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31490 Nomenclature ! Options
31496 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31498 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
31505 \begin_layout Standard
31510 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
31511 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
31514 \begin_layout Description
31515 refeq Appends the phrase
31516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31531 to every nomenclature entry, where
31537 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
31540 \begin_layout Description
31541 refpage Appends the phrase
31542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31557 to every nomenclature entry, where
31563 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
31566 \begin_layout Description
31567 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
31570 \begin_layout Standard
31571 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
31572 class options list in the
31574 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31578 In this document the options
31585 \begin_layout Standard
31586 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31592 \begin_layout Standard
31593 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
31594 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
31599 field in the nomenclature dialog:
31602 \begin_layout Description
31612 \begin_layout Description
31615 nomrefpage Like the
31622 \begin_layout Description
31625 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
31634 \begin_layout Description
31638 \begin_inset space ~
31644 \begin_inset space ~
31649 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
31652 \begin_layout Standard
31654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31661 are automatically translated for most document languages.
31662 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
31666 \begin_layout Standard
31675 \begin_inset Newline newline
31681 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
31684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31685 \begin_inset space ~
31697 unskip, see equation
31700 \begin_inset Newline newline
31707 pagedeclaration}[1]{
31708 \begin_inset Newline newline
31714 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
31717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31718 \begin_inset space ~
31735 \begin_layout Standard
31736 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
31739 \begin_inset space ~
31744 in the document settings under
31747 \begin_inset space ~
31755 \begin_layout Standard
31763 \begin_inset Newline newline
31767 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
31770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31771 \begin_inset space ~
31783 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
31785 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
31786 \begin_inset Newline newline
31793 pagedeclaration}[1]{
31794 \begin_inset Newline newline
31798 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
31801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31802 \begin_inset space ~
31814 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
31819 \begin_layout Subsection
31820 Printing the Nomenclature
31821 \begin_inset Index idx
31824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31825 Nomenclature ! Printing
31833 \begin_layout Standard
31834 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
31836 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31837 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31853 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
31854 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
31855 You can choose between these settings:
31858 \begin_layout Description
31859 Default a space of 1
31860 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31866 \begin_layout Description
31868 \begin_inset space ~
31872 \begin_inset space ~
31875 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
31878 \begin_layout Description
31879 Custom custom space
31882 \begin_layout Standard
31883 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
31884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31892 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
31900 For example, in order to change the name to
31904 , add the following line to the preamble:
31907 \begin_layout Standard
31915 nomname}{List of Symbols}
31918 \begin_layout Subsection
31919 Nomenclature Program
31920 \begin_inset Index idx
31923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31924 Nomenclature ! Program
31930 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31932 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
31939 \begin_layout Standard
31945 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
31946 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
31948 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
31953 by adding options, see section
31954 \begin_inset space ~
31958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31960 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
31965 The available options are listed and explained in
31966 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31968 key "nomencl,makeindex"
31976 \begin_layout Section
31978 \begin_inset Index idx
31981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31988 \begin_inset Index idx
31991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31992 Document ! Branches
31998 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32000 name "sec:Branches"
32007 \begin_layout Standard
32008 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
32009 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
32010 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
32011 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
32014 \begin_layout Standard
32015 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
32016 allows you to put text into branches.
32017 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
32018 To create a branch, either select the menu
32020 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32021 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
32024 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
32026 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32033 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
32034 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
32035 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
32036 and whether the name of the branch should
32037 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
32038 (see below for an example).
32039 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
32040 to the name of the other) and to add
32041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32049 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32053 \begin_inset space ~
32056 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
32057 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
32060 \begin_layout Standard
32061 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
32062 These boxes are inserted via the menu
32064 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32067 where you can choose a branch.
32068 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
32072 \begin_layout Standard
32073 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
32074 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
32077 \begin_layout Standard
32078 \begin_inset Branch Question
32082 \begin_layout Standard
32087 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
32095 \begin_layout Standard
32096 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32100 \begin_layout Standard
32105 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
32113 \begin_layout Standard
32120 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32121 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32124 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
32125 Consider for example a file
32126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32133 which has the above branches.
32135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32142 is active, the PDF export file would be called
32143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32166 branch were inactive,
32167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32182 branch was active, likewise
32183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32198 branch was active, and
32199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32202 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
32203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32206 if both branches were active.
32207 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
32208 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32214 \begin_layout Standard
32215 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
32221 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
32222 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
32226 \begin_inset space ~
32234 \begin_layout Standard
32235 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32239 \begin_layout Standard
32245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32252 branch is deactivated.
32258 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32264 \begin_layout Standard
32265 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
32266 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
32267 definitions for each branch.
32268 For example you can define for the question branch
32272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32273 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32274 -syntax, see section
32275 \begin_inset space ~
32279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32281 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32293 \begin_layout Standard
32303 \begin_layout Standard
32313 \begin_layout Standard
32314 and for the answer branch
32317 \begin_layout Standard
32327 \begin_layout Standard
32337 \begin_layout Standard
32338 \begin_inset Branch Question
32342 \begin_layout Standard
32346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32374 \begin_layout Standard
32375 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32379 \begin_layout Standard
32383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32411 \begin_layout Standard
32412 Now it is possible to use the
32416 question{\SpecialChar ldots
32423 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
32426 commands to obtain conditional output.
32427 Here is an example formula where only the
32434 \begin_inset Formula
32436 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
32444 \begin_layout Standard
32445 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
32453 \begin_layout Standard
32454 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
32456 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32460 \begin_inset space \space{}
32463 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
32465 For this advanced usage, see the
32471 Flex insets and InsetLayout
32476 \begin_layout Section
32478 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32480 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
32485 \begin_inset Index idx
32488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32497 \begin_layout Standard
32500 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32501 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32504 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
32506 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32512 \begin_inset Index idx
32515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32517 packages ! hyperref
32522 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
32523 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
32524 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
32525 part of the document.
32529 \begin_layout Standard
32530 The header information in the dialog tab
32534 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
32535 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
32536 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
32537 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
32541 \begin_inset space ~
32545 \begin_inset space ~
32550 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
32551 tries to extract the header information from your document title
32552 and author entries.
32556 \begin_inset space ~
32560 \begin_inset space ~
32564 \begin_inset space ~
32569 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
32572 \begin_layout Standard
32573 You can specify in the dialog tab
32577 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
32582 \begin_inset space ~
32586 \begin_inset space ~
32590 \begin_inset space ~
32595 option allows long links to be split;
32598 \begin_inset space ~
32602 \begin_inset space ~
32606 \begin_inset space ~
32614 \begin_inset space ~
32619 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
32622 \begin_inset space ~
32627 colors the different links.
32628 The default colors are:
32631 \begin_layout Labeling
32632 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32637 for hyperlinks and URLs
32640 \begin_layout Labeling
32641 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32649 \begin_layout Labeling
32650 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32658 \begin_layout Standard
32659 but you can change these in the field
32664 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
32667 \begin_layout Standard
32670 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
32673 \begin_layout Standard
32678 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
32679 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
32680 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
32683 \begin_layout Standard
32688 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
32689 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
32690 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
32700 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
32701 when opening the PDF.
32703 \begin_inset space ~
32706 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
32707 \begin_inset space ~
32710 1 will only display the sections.
32713 \begin_layout Standard
32714 PDF properties are also used in this document.
32715 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
32721 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
32722 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32732 \begin_layout Section
32734 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32736 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32738 name "sec:TeX-Code"
32745 \begin_layout Subsection
32748 \begin_inset Index idx
32751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32759 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32761 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
32768 \begin_layout Standard
32769 As \SpecialChar LyX
32770 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
32771 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
32772 commands and constructs,
32775 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
32776 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
32777 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
32778 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32779 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
32780 cannot support all packages and
32784 \begin_layout Standard
32785 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
32786 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
32787 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
32791 Code box is created by the menu
32793 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32795 \begin_inset space ~
32800 or by the toolbar button
32813 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
32821 \begin_layout Standard
32822 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
32824 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
32826 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
32830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32831 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
32836 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32843 , you can write the command part
32849 in a \SpecialChar TeX
32850 Code box before the word and the closing brace
32854 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
32855 Code box behind the word.
32856 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
32857 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
32861 \begin_layout Standard
32862 \begin_inset Graphics
32863 filename clipart/ERT.png
32871 \begin_layout Standard
32875 \begin_layout Standard
32876 This is a line with a
32880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32903 \begin_layout Standard
32904 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32912 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32913 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
32914 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
32915 know that the command is finished.
32923 \begin_layout Subsection
32924 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32926 \begin_inset Argument 1
32929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32930 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32937 \begin_inset Index idx
32940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32948 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32950 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32957 \begin_layout Standard
32958 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
32959 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32960 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
32961 uses in the background.
32962 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
32963 is based on commands, you can
32964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32972 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
32973 any time if you know the right commands.
32974 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
32975 is the end of the day.
32976 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
32977 all caption labels bold.
32978 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
32980 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
32984 \begin_layout Standard
32985 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
32987 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32989 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32992 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33002 \begin_layout Standard
33003 As result you find that the package
33008 \begin_inset Index idx
33011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33019 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
33021 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33024 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33028 \begin_inset space ~
33036 \begin_layout Standard
33041 usepackage[options]{package name}
33044 \begin_layout Standard
33045 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
33046 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
33047 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
33048 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
33051 \begin_layout Standard
33052 In your case the package name is
33057 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
33062 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
33063 So you add the command
33066 \begin_layout Standard
33071 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
33074 \begin_layout Standard
33075 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
33079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33080 For more commands provided by the
33084 package, have a look at its documentation,
33085 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33100 \begin_layout Standard
33101 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
33103 For example if you use a
33107 class, you don't need the package
33111 , you can instead write
33114 \begin_layout Standard
33119 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
33124 \begin_layout Standard
33125 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
33126 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
33127 documentation of the document class you want to use.
33134 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
33137 \begin_layout Standard
33138 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
33139 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
33141 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33142 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
33143 Code box as described in the previous
33147 \begin_layout Standard
33148 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
33149 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33152 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33154 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
33162 \begin_layout Standard
33163 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
33169 \begin_layout Standard
33173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33183 \begin_inset Note Note
33186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33187 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
33195 \begin_layout Left Header
33196 \begin_inset Argument 1
33199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33219 \begin_inset Note Note
33222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33223 defines the header line as described below
33231 \begin_layout Center Header
33232 \begin_inset Argument 1
33235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33244 \begin_layout Right Header
33245 \begin_inset Argument 1
33248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33269 \begin_layout Left Footer
33270 \begin_inset Argument 1
33273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33294 \begin_layout Center Footer
33295 \begin_inset Argument 1
33298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33310 \begin_inset Newline newline
33314 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33320 \begin_layout Right Footer
33321 \begin_inset Argument 1
33324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33346 \begin_layout Section
33347 Customized Page Headers and Footers
33348 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33350 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
33355 \begin_inset Index idx
33358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33359 Document ! Header/Footer line
33365 \begin_inset Index idx
33368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33377 \begin_layout Standard
33378 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
33382 \begin_inset space ~
33393 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33399 \begin_inset space ~
33405 As a second step add in the menu
33407 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33408 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33417 Custom Header/Footerlines
33420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33424 This module offers the following 6
33425 \begin_inset space ~
33431 \begin_layout Description
33433 \begin_inset space ~
33437 \begin_inset space ~
33441 \begin_inset space ~
33445 \begin_inset space ~
33449 \begin_inset space ~
33455 \begin_layout Description
33457 \begin_inset space ~
33461 \begin_inset space ~
33465 \begin_inset space ~
33469 \begin_inset space ~
33473 \begin_inset space ~
33479 \begin_layout Standard
33480 for the different positions in the header/footer.
33481 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
33484 \begin_layout Standard
33485 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
33486 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
33488 \begin_inset space ~
33492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33494 reference "fig:Page-layout"
33498 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
33501 \begin_layout Standard
33502 \begin_inset Float figure
33508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33511 \begin_inset Tabular
33512 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
33513 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
33514 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33515 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33516 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33518 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
33530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33536 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33547 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33565 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33576 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
33579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33580 The normal text on the page goes here.
33581 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
33583 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
33584 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
33589 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33598 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33609 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33627 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33638 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
33650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33656 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33674 \begin_inset Caption Standard
33676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33677 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33679 name "fig:Page-layout"
33683 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
33696 \begin_layout Standard
33697 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33705 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
33709 \begin_inset space ~
33714 is set to “Default”.
33715 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
33724 \begin_layout Subsection
33728 \begin_layout Standard
33729 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
33730 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
33731 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
33732 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
33734 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
33736 Defining the footer line works similarly.
33739 \begin_layout Standard
33740 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
33741 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33745 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33747 \begin_inset space ~
33755 \begin_layout Description
33758 thepage prints the current page number
33761 \begin_layout Description
33764 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
33767 \begin_layout Description
33770 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
33773 \begin_layout Description
33776 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
33777 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
33780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33784 \begin_inset Quotes prd
33787 because it usually goes in a left header.
33790 \begin_layout Description
33793 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
33794 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
33796 It is normally used in the right header.
33799 \begin_layout Subsection
33800 Default header/footer
33803 \begin_layout Standard
33804 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
33805 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
33806 footer has the page number.
33807 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
33808 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
33809 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
33812 \begin_inset space ~
33820 \begin_layout Subsection
33824 \begin_layout Standard
33825 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
33826 Some pages are different.
33827 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
33828 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
33829 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
33830 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
33831 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
33834 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33835 Header and footer decoration line
33838 \begin_layout Standard
33839 By default, you get a 0.4
33840 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33843 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
33844 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
33856 in the following way:
33859 \begin_layout Standard
33866 headrulewidth}{thickness}
33869 \begin_layout Standard
33870 where thickness is a size in standard units like
33883 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
33884 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33890 \begin_layout Standard
33891 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33893 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
33894 \begin_inset space ~
33898 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33908 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33909 Several header/footer lines
33912 \begin_layout Standard
33913 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
33914 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
33915 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
33917 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33932 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33933 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33935 \begin_inset space ~
33943 \begin_layout Standard
33950 headheight}{height}
33953 \begin_layout Standard
33958 is a size in standard units (e.
33959 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33963 \begin_inset space \space{}
33971 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
33972 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
33973 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33974 logfile with the menu
33976 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33978 \begin_inset space ~
33986 \begin_inset space ~
33991 to see if you can find a warning about the package
33996 \begin_inset Index idx
33999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34001 packages ! fancyhdr
34007 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
34008 for your header/footer.
34011 \begin_layout Subsection
34015 \begin_layout Standard
34016 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
34017 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
34018 This example consists of the following definition:
34021 \begin_layout Description
34023 \begin_inset space ~
34032 , empty optional argument
34035 \begin_layout Description
34037 \begin_inset space ~
34040 Header empty, empty optional argument
34043 \begin_layout Description
34045 \begin_inset space ~
34054 in the optional argument
34057 \begin_layout Description
34059 \begin_inset space ~
34068 in the optional argument
34071 \begin_layout Description
34073 \begin_inset space ~
34086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34090 \begin_inset Newline newline
34094 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34101 in the optional argument
34104 \begin_layout Description
34106 \begin_inset space ~
34115 , empty optional argument
34118 \begin_layout Description
34121 headrulewidth set to 2
34122 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34128 \begin_layout Standard
34129 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
34130 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
34136 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34146 \begin_layout Standard
34147 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34153 \begin_layout Standard
34157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34161 pagestyle{headings}
34167 \begin_inset Note Note
34170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34171 switches back to page style with the default headings
34179 \begin_layout Section
34180 Previewing Snippets of your Document
34181 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34183 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
34188 \begin_inset Index idx
34191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34198 \begin_inset Index idx
34201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34210 \begin_layout Standard
34212 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
34213 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
34214 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
34217 \begin_layout Subsection
34221 \begin_layout Standard
34222 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34228 \begin_inset Index idx
34231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34233 packages ! preview-latex
34238 (on some systems named simply
34243 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34245 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34252 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34254 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
34262 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
34263 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34264 -package are automatically
34265 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
34269 \begin_layout Subsection
34273 \begin_layout Standard
34274 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34275 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34277 activate the option
34280 \begin_inset space ~
34287 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34293 \begin_inset space ~
34297 \begin_inset space ~
34300 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
34307 \begin_inset space ~
34320 \begin_inset space ~
34325 is the multiplication factor for the size.
34328 \begin_layout Standard
34329 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34334 \begin_inset space ~
34342 \begin_inset space ~
34350 \begin_layout Standard
34351 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
34352 and when you finish
34356 \begin_layout Standard
34357 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34365 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
34366 generated by activating the option
34369 \begin_inset space ~
34375 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
34383 \begin_layout Subsection
34384 Selected document parts
34387 \begin_layout Standard
34388 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
34389 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
34390 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
34391 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34393 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
34395 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34399 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
34400 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
34401 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
34404 \begin_layout Standard
34405 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34412 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34424 is explained in section
34426 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
34431 \begin_inset space ~
34441 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
34442 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34443 the final rotated boxes,
34444 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
34445 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
34447 Here is the result:
34450 \begin_layout Standard
34451 \begin_inset Preview
34453 \begin_layout Standard
34458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34462 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
34468 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
34478 height_special "totalheight"
34483 backgroundcolor "none"
34486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34511 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
34517 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
34524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34539 \begin_layout Standard
34540 Previewing works also for colors.
34541 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34560 is explained in section
34567 \begin_inset space ~
34580 \begin_layout Standard
34581 \begin_inset Preview
34583 \begin_layout Standard
34587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34606 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
34611 This is text within a colored, framed box.
34615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34630 \begin_layout Standard
34631 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
34637 \begin_layout Standard
34638 If \SpecialChar LyX
34639 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
34640 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
34641 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
34642 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34643 packages in your document preamble that are required by
34644 the \SpecialChar TeX
34646 If \SpecialChar LyX
34647 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
34648 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
34650 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
34651 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
34652 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
34655 \begin_layout Subsection
34660 \begin_layout Standard
34661 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34662 source of the whole document or parts of it.
34665 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34667 \begin_inset space ~
34672 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34674 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
34676 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
34677 's main window, then only this selection
34678 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
34679 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
34680 the source view window.
34685 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
34686 ; but note that if you have
34687 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
34689 not just the one which is open at the time.
34692 \begin_layout Section
34693 Advanced Find and Replace
34694 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34696 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34701 \begin_inset Index idx
34704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34711 \begin_inset Index idx
34714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34723 \begin_layout Subsection
34727 \begin_layout Standard
34728 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
34729 allows for searching of complex,
34730 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
34732 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
34733 The key-features are:
34736 \begin_layout Itemize
34737 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
34738 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
34739 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
34743 \begin_layout Itemize
34744 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
34745 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
34746 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
34747 a section heading will only be found within section headings
34750 \begin_layout Itemize
34751 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
34752 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
34753 outside of mathematics environments
34756 \begin_layout Itemize
34757 Search may be widened to a specific
34762 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34766 \begin_inset space ~
34769 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
34770 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
34777 \begin_layout Itemize
34778 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
34779 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
34780 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34784 \begin_inset space ~
34787 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
34790 \begin_layout Subsection
34794 \begin_layout Standard
34795 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
34797 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
34810 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
34813 ) or the toolbar button
34816 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
34822 Advanced Find and Replace
34827 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34831 \begin_layout Standard
34837 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
34841 \begin_inset space ~
34846 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
34849 arg "paragraph-break"
34853 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
34854 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
34858 arg "paragraph-break"
34861 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
34865 searches backwards.
34868 \begin_layout Standard
34872 \begin_inset space ~
34877 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
34886 \begin_inset space ~
34891 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
34894 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34895 Searching for mathematics
34898 \begin_layout Standard
34899 Mathematical formulas, such as
34900 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
34903 or something more complex like
34904 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
34907 , may be searched for by typing them in the
34912 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
34913 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
34914 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
34915 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
34921 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34925 \begin_layout Standard
34926 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
34927 This is done by switching to the
34931 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
34936 This way, entering in the
34943 \begin_layout Itemize
34944 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
34945 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
34948 \begin_layout Itemize
34949 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
34950 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
34953 \begin_layout Itemize
34954 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
34955 of it only within section headings.
34956 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
34957 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
34961 \begin_layout Itemize
34962 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
34963 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
34966 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34970 \begin_layout Standard
34971 The entries made in the
34975 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
34978 \begin_inset space ~
34984 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
34988 button or alternatively press
34991 arg "paragraph-break"
34998 while the cursor is in the
35001 \begin_inset space ~
35009 \begin_layout Standard
35010 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
35012 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
35016 \begin_layout Itemize
35017 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
35018 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
35019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35026 with its typewriter version
35027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35041 \begin_layout Itemize
35042 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
35044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35048 \begin_inset Formula $R$
35052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35060 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
35064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35067 (you may want to enable the
35070 \begin_inset space ~
35078 \begin_inset space ~
35083 options and disable the
35091 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
35092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35099 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
35100 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
35104 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
35107 , or occurrences of
35108 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
35112 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
35118 \begin_layout Subsection
35122 \begin_layout Standard
35123 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
35127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35128 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
35130 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35132 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
35142 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
35148 This is done with the context menu
35150 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35151 Insert Regular Expression
35153 while the cursor is in the
35158 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
35159 expression matching rules
35163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35164 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
35167 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35171 \begin_inset space ~
35174 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
35175 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
35181 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
35182 same text in the document.
35183 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
35184 Examples of using such a feature may be:
35187 \begin_layout Enumerate
35188 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
35193 editor the fraction
35194 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
35198 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35201 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
35202 fractions with the given denominator.
35205 \begin_layout Enumerate
35206 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
35218 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35223 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
35224 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
35225 Also, by inserting a
35226 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35229 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
35230 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
35233 \begin_layout Standard
35234 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
35235 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
35236 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35239 , and referring back to them through
35240 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35244 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
35248 For example, try searching with the regexp
35249 \begin_inset Newline newline
35252 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
35255 \begin_inset Newline newline
35258 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
35261 \begin_layout Standard
35262 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
35265 \begin_layout Standard
35266 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35274 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
35275 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
35276 sub-expressions is absolute.
35278 \begin_inset space ~
35282 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35285 always refers to the first occurrence of
35286 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35289 in all entered regexps.
35297 \begin_layout Section
35299 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35301 name "sec:Spellchecking"
35306 \begin_inset Index idx
35309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35318 \begin_layout Standard
35320 has a built-in spell checker.
35323 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35330 key or the toolbar button
35333 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
35336 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
35337 beginning of the currently selected text.
35338 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
35339 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
35340 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
35341 scrolled so that it is visible.
35342 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
35343 n, if any could be found.
35344 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
35348 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
35349 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
35352 \begin_layout Standard
35353 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
35356 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35360 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
35361 a different one at the top of the dialog.
35363 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
35364 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
35367 \begin_inset space ~
35375 arg "dialog-show character"
35378 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
35380 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
35383 \begin_layout Standard
35384 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35385 can be downloaded from here:
35386 \begin_inset Newline newline
35390 \begin_inset Flex URL
35393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35395 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
35401 \begin_inset Newline newline
35405 \begin_inset space ~
35408 files for each language.
35409 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
35410 \begin_inset space ~
35413 files into \SpecialChar LyX
35414 's installation subfolder
35422 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35424 \begin_inset Newline newline
35427 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
35428 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
35429 but in most cases these are
35445 is the language code.
35448 \begin_layout Subsection
35452 \begin_layout Standard
35455 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35456 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35458 \begin_inset space ~
35461 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35464 you can set the following things:
35467 \begin_layout Description
35469 \begin_inset space ~
35472 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
35473 should use for spell checking.
35474 Depending on your platform,
35484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35485 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
35486 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
35501 \begin_inset space ~
35504 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
35507 \begin_layout Description
35509 \begin_inset space ~
35512 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
35513 will always use the given language
35514 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
35517 \begin_layout Description
35519 \begin_inset space ~
35522 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
35524 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35528 \begin_inset space \space{}
35532 This should normally not be needed.
35535 \begin_layout Description
35537 \begin_inset space ~
35541 \begin_inset space ~
35544 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
35546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35556 \begin_layout Description
35558 \begin_inset space ~
35561 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
35562 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
35563 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
35564 appear in a context menu.
35565 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
35569 \begin_layout Description
35571 \begin_inset space ~
35575 \begin_inset space ~
35579 \begin_inset space ~
35582 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
35586 \begin_layout Section
35588 \begin_inset Index idx
35591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35598 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35600 name "sec:Thesaurus"
35607 \begin_layout Standard
35609 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
35610 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
35619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35620 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35622 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
35632 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
35634 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
35635 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
35636 which are available for many languages.
35639 \begin_layout Standard
35640 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
35641 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
35645 \begin_layout Subsection
35646 Setting up the thesaurus
35649 \begin_layout Standard
35658 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
35662 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
35667 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
35669 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35673 \begin_inset space ~
35681 For instance, the US English files are named:
35684 \begin_layout Itemize
35688 \begin_layout Itemize
35692 \begin_layout Standard
35701 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
35702 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
35705 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35706 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35707 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35709 \begin_inset space ~
35714 ) to the path where they are installed.
35718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35719 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
35720 ies, typical locations are
35726 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
35730 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
35734 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
35737 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
35743 LibreOffice-<Version>
35750 On the Mac, the default location is
35752 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
35753 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35754 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
35755 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
35756 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35757 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35765 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
35766 during the \SpecialChar LyX
35767 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
35771 \begin_layout Standard
35772 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
35773 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
35775 \begin_inset Newline newline
35779 \begin_inset Flex URL
35782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35784 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
35792 \begin_layout Standard
35793 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
35794 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
35796 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35797 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35798 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35800 \begin_inset space ~
35805 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35807 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
35808 and point \SpecialChar LyX
35812 \begin_layout Standard
35813 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
35815 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35818 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
35824 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
35827 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
35828 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
35830 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35836 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35837 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35838 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35840 \begin_inset space ~
35845 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
35848 \begin_layout Subsection
35849 Using the thesaurus
35852 \begin_layout Standard
35853 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
35855 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35858 or the toolbar button
35861 arg "thesaurus-entry"
35864 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
35866 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
35868 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
35869 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
35870 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
35879 ), related terms (such as
35882 \begin_inset space ~
35891 ), compounds (such as
35894 \begin_inset space ~
35903 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
35912 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
35915 \begin_layout Standard
35916 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
35917 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
35921 \begin_layout Standard
35922 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
35923 the dictionary, such as the above
35927 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
35928 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35932 \begin_inset space \space{}
35935 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
35936 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
35937 For example, looking up the word form
35941 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
35946 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
35947 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35951 \begin_inset space \space{}
35962 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
35963 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
35964 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
35967 \begin_layout Section
35969 \begin_inset Index idx
35972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35979 \begin_inset Index idx
35982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35983 Document ! Change Tracking
35989 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35991 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
35998 \begin_layout Standard
35999 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
36000 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
36001 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
36002 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
36004 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36006 \begin_inset space ~
36009 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36011 \begin_inset space ~
36019 \begin_layout Standard
36020 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
36034 The color depends on the author that made the change.
36035 You can change the color in
36037 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36038 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36040 \begin_inset space ~
36044 \begin_inset space ~
36049 \SpecialChar menuseparator
36055 \begin_inset Index idx
36058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36059 Color ! Change tracking
36064 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
36065 's status bar when the
36066 cursor is in changed text.
36067 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
36070 arg "changes-merge"
36076 \begin_layout Standard
36077 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
36079 \begin_inset Index idx
36082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36091 \begin_layout Standard
36092 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36098 \begin_layout Standard
36099 \begin_inset Graphics
36100 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
36108 \begin_layout Standard
36109 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36115 \begin_layout Standard
36116 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
36119 \begin_layout Standard
36120 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36126 \begin_layout Standard
36127 \begin_inset Tabular
36128 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
36129 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
36130 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36131 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36132 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36141 arg "changes-track"
36149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36155 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36157 \begin_inset space ~
36160 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36162 \begin_inset space ~
36171 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36180 arg "changes-output"
36188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36194 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36196 \begin_inset space ~
36199 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36201 \begin_inset space ~
36205 \begin_inset space ~
36209 \begin_inset space ~
36218 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36239 Jumps to the next change
36245 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36254 arg "change-accept"
36262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36268 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36270 \begin_inset space ~
36273 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36275 \begin_inset space ~
36284 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36293 arg "change-reject"
36301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36307 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36309 \begin_inset space ~
36312 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36314 \begin_inset space ~
36323 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36332 arg "changes-merge"
36340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36346 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36348 \begin_inset space ~
36351 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36353 \begin_inset space ~
36362 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36371 arg "all-changes-accept"
36379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36385 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36387 \begin_inset space ~
36390 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36392 \begin_inset space ~
36396 \begin_inset space ~
36405 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36414 arg "all-changes-reject"
36422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36428 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36430 \begin_inset space ~
36433 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36435 \begin_inset space ~
36439 \begin_inset space ~
36448 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36471 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36472 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
36474 \begin_inset space ~
36483 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36506 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
36508 \begin_inset space ~
36524 \begin_layout Standard
36525 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36531 \begin_layout Standard
36532 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
36552 \begin_layout Standard
36553 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
36554 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
36555 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
36556 the next change after the current cursor position.
36557 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
36558 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
36559 step to the next change.
36560 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
36563 \begin_layout Standard
36564 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
36565 to describe a change.
36568 \begin_layout Standard
36569 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36575 \begin_inset Index idx
36578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36586 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36588 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36595 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36599 \begin_layout Section
36600 Comparison of Documents
36601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36603 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
36608 \begin_inset Index idx
36611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36612 Comparison of documents
36620 \begin_layout Standard
36621 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
36624 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36628 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
36629 file with change tracking enabled showing the
36631 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
36633 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
36637 \begin_inset space ~
36641 \begin_inset space ~
36645 \begin_inset space ~
36654 \begin_inset space ~
36658 \begin_inset space ~
36662 \begin_inset space ~
36666 \begin_inset space ~
36670 \begin_inset space ~
36674 \begin_inset space ~
36679 enables the change tracking option
36682 \begin_inset space ~
36686 \begin_inset space ~
36690 \begin_inset space ~
36695 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
36698 \begin_layout Section
36699 International Support
36700 \begin_inset Index idx
36703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36704 International support
36712 \begin_layout Standard
36713 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
36714 with any language you want.
36715 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
36716 up \SpecialChar LyX
36718 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36720 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
36728 \begin_layout Standard
36729 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
36730 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
36731 \begin_inset space ~
36735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36737 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
36744 \begin_layout Subsection
36746 \begin_inset Index idx
36749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36756 \begin_inset Index idx
36759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36760 Document ! Settings
36766 \begin_inset Index idx
36769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36770 Document ! Language
36778 \begin_layout Standard
36781 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36782 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36785 dialog lets you set
36787 the language, the quote style and character encoding
36792 \begin_layout Standard
36797 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
36802 \begin_inset space ~
36807 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
36808 For details about the different encoding options see section
36809 \begin_inset space ~
36813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36815 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
36822 \begin_layout Subsection
36823 Keyboard mapping configuration
36824 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36826 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
36833 \begin_layout Standard
36834 If you have for example a U.
36835 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36838 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
36839 can use an alternate keymap.
36840 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
36845 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36846 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36847 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
36850 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
36851 \begin_inset space ~
36855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36857 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
36862 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
36863 which one you want to use.
36866 \begin_layout Standard
36867 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
36868 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
36869 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
36870 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36873 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
36874 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
36875 one to support the characters you want.
36876 This and many other customizations are explained in the
36883 \begin_layout Chapter
36886 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36888 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
36895 \begin_layout Standard
36896 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
36897 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
36898 topic inside the user's guide.
36901 \begin_layout Section
36903 \begin_inset Index idx
36906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36915 \begin_layout Standard
36920 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
36923 \begin_layout Subsection
36927 \begin_layout Standard
36928 Creates a new document.
36931 \begin_layout Subsection
36935 \begin_layout Standard
36936 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
36937 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
36938 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
36941 \begin_layout Subsection
36945 \begin_layout Standard
36949 \begin_layout Subsection
36953 \begin_layout Standard
36954 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
36955 Click there on a file to open it.
36958 \begin_layout Subsection
36962 \begin_layout Standard
36963 Closes the current document.
36966 \begin_layout Subsection
36970 \begin_layout Standard
36971 Closes all opened documents.
36974 \begin_layout Subsection
36978 \begin_layout Standard
36979 Saves the actual document.
36982 \begin_layout Subsection
36986 \begin_layout Standard
36987 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
36990 \begin_layout Subsection
36994 \begin_layout Standard
36995 Saves all opened documents.
36998 \begin_layout Subsection
37002 \begin_layout Standard
37003 Reloads the actual document from disk.
37006 \begin_layout Subsection
37010 \begin_layout Standard
37011 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
37012 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
37013 It is described in the section
37015 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
37020 Additional Features
37025 \begin_layout Subsection
37029 \begin_layout Standard
37030 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
37031 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
37033 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
37034 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
37038 \begin_layout Standard
37039 When using the menu entry
37042 \begin_inset space ~
37047 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
37051 \begin_inset space ~
37055 \begin_inset space ~
37059 \begin_inset space ~
37064 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
37065 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
37068 \begin_layout Subsection
37070 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37072 name "subsec:Export"
37079 \begin_layout Standard
37080 You can export your document to various file formats.
37081 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
37083 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
37084 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
37085 during its configuration.
37088 \begin_layout Standard
37089 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
37091 \begin_inset space ~
37095 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37097 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
37104 \begin_layout Description
37110 \begin_inset space ~
37113 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
37115 \begin_inset space ~
37118 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
37119 \begin_inset Newline newline
37122 Since \SpecialChar LyX
37123 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
37127 \begin_layout Description
37128 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
37134 \begin_layout Description
37136 \begin_inset space ~
37139 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
37145 \begin_layout Description
37146 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
37147 's native DVI-format.
37148 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
37149 files paths or file names in your document.
37151 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
37158 \begin_layout Description
37159 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
37160 in files paths or file names
37163 \begin_layout Description
37165 \begin_inset space ~
37172 ) DVI-format using the program
37174 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37177 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
37181 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37189 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
37197 \begin_layout Description
37199 \begin_inset space ~
37202 (cropped) the same as
37206 but with cropped page margins.
37209 \begin_layout Description
37211 \begin_inset space ~
37214 Dot text file with code in the programming language
37218 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
37223 \begin_layout Description
37227 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37235 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
37243 \begin_layout Description
37245 \begin_inset space ~
37249 \begin_inset space ~
37252 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
37256 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
37264 \begin_layout Description
37268 \begin_inset space ~
37277 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37278 source that is compilable with the program
37280 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37284 \begin_layout Description
37288 \begin_inset space ~
37293 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37294 source, additionally all images used in the document
37295 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
37299 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
37302 \begin_layout Description
37306 \begin_inset space ~
37311 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37312 source code, additionally all images used in the document
37313 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
37321 \begin_layout Description
37325 \begin_inset space ~
37334 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37335 source that is compilable with the program
37341 \begin_layout Description
37343 \begin_inset space ~
37347 \begin_inset space ~
37354 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37355 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
37361 \begin_layout Description
37363 \begin_inset space ~
37366 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
37367 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
37369 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37373 \begin_inset space \space{}
37378 \begin_inset space ~
37382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37397 represent the version number)
37400 \begin_layout Description
37402 \begin_inset space ~
37406 \begin_inset space ~
37409 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
37410 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
37411 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37415 \begin_layout Description
37416 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
37417 's internal XHTML engine
37420 \begin_layout Description
37422 \begin_inset space ~
37426 \begin_inset space ~
37430 \begin_inset space ~
37434 \begin_inset space ~
37437 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
37442 For the conversion the program
37451 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37454 \begin_layout Description
37455 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
37460 \begin_layout Description
37462 \begin_inset space ~
37465 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
37467 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
37470 For the conversion the program
37479 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37482 \begin_layout Description
37484 \begin_inset space ~
37487 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
37488 For the conversion the program
37497 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37500 \begin_layout Description
37502 \begin_inset space ~
37505 (cropped) the same as
37508 \begin_inset space ~
37513 but with cropped page margins
37516 \begin_layout Description
37520 \begin_inset space ~
37525 PDF-format using the program
37529 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37532 \begin_layout Description
37536 \begin_inset space ~
37540 \begin_inset space ~
37548 \begin_inset space ~
37553 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
37554 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37558 \begin_inset space \space{}
37561 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
37565 \begin_layout Description
37569 \begin_inset space ~
37574 PDF-format using the program
37576 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37579 , produces PDF-files directly
37582 \begin_layout Description
37586 \begin_inset space ~
37591 PDF-format using the program
37595 , produces PDF-files directly
37598 \begin_layout Description
37602 \begin_inset space ~
37607 PDF-format using the program
37611 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37614 \begin_layout Description
37618 \begin_inset space ~
37623 PDF-format using the program
37628 , produces PDF-files directly
37631 \begin_layout Description
37635 \begin_inset space ~
37643 \begin_layout Description
37647 \begin_inset space ~
37651 \begin_inset space ~
37656 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
37657 and then exported as text using the program
37662 \begin_layout Description
37667 PostScript format using the program
37675 options see section
37676 \begin_inset space ~
37680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37682 reference "subsec:General-output"
37689 \begin_layout Description
37690 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37691 source and also code in the statistical programming
37705 it is possible to use
37709 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
37713 \begin_layout Standard
37714 If one of the menu entries
37721 \begin_inset space ~
37730 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37732 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37734 \begin_inset space ~
37738 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37740 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37745 \begin_inset Index idx
37748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37749 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37758 \begin_layout Subsection
37762 \begin_layout Standard
37763 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
37764 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
37767 \begin_inset space ~
37771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37773 reference "sec:Paths"
37778 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
37787 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
37788 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
37789 's preferences as described in section
37790 \begin_inset space ~
37794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37796 reference "subsec:Converters"
37803 \begin_layout Subsection
37804 New and Close Window
37807 \begin_layout Standard
37808 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
37812 \begin_layout Subsection
37816 \begin_layout Standard
37817 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
37820 \begin_layout Section
37822 \begin_inset Index idx
37825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37834 \begin_layout Subsection
37838 \begin_layout Standard
37839 Described in section
37840 \begin_inset space ~
37844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37846 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
37853 \begin_layout Subsection
37854 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
37857 \begin_layout Standard
37858 Described in section
37859 \begin_inset space ~
37863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37865 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37872 \begin_layout Subsection
37876 \begin_layout Standard
37877 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
37878 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
37881 \begin_layout Subsection
37885 \begin_layout Standard
37886 Selects the whole document.
37889 \begin_layout Subsection
37890 Find & Replace (Quick)
37893 \begin_layout Standard
37894 Described in section
37895 \begin_inset space ~
37899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37901 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37908 \begin_layout Subsection
37909 Find & Replace (Advanced)
37912 \begin_layout Standard
37913 Described in section
37914 \begin_inset space ~
37918 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37920 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
37927 \begin_layout Subsection
37928 Move Paragraph Up/Down
37931 \begin_layout Standard
37932 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
37936 \begin_layout Subsection
37940 \begin_layout Standard
37941 Described in section
37942 \begin_inset space ~
37946 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37948 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
37955 \begin_layout Subsection
37957 \begin_inset Index idx
37960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37961 Paragraph ! Settings
37969 \begin_layout Standard
37970 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
37971 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
37975 \begin_layout Standard
37976 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
37977 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
37983 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37984 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37986 \begin_inset space ~
37994 \begin_layout Subsection
37995 Table and Rows & Columns
37998 \begin_layout Standard
37999 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
38000 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
38001 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
38004 \begin_layout Subsection
38008 \begin_layout Standard
38009 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
38010 It will dissolve this inset.
38011 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
38015 \begin_layout Subsection
38019 \begin_layout Standard
38020 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
38021 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
38024 \begin_layout Subsection
38025 Increase/Decrease List Depth
38028 \begin_layout Standard
38029 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
38031 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
38032 \begin_inset space ~
38036 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38038 reference "sec:Nesting"
38043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38045 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
38052 \begin_layout Section
38054 \begin_inset Index idx
38057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38066 \begin_layout Standard
38067 At the bottom of the
38071 menu the opened documents are listed.
38074 \begin_layout Subsection
38075 Open/Close all Insets
38078 \begin_layout Standard
38079 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
38082 \begin_layout Subsection
38083 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
38086 \begin_layout Standard
38087 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
38090 \begin_layout Standard
38091 Math macros are described in the
38098 \begin_layout Subsection
38102 \begin_layout Standard
38103 Shows the outline window as described in sections
38104 \begin_inset space ~
38108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38110 reference "sec:Navigating"
38115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38117 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
38124 \begin_layout Subsection
38128 \begin_layout Standard
38129 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
38131 \begin_inset space ~
38135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38137 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
38144 \begin_layout Subsection
38148 \begin_layout Standard
38149 Opens a window showing console messages.
38150 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
38152 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38155 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
38156 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
38157 is processing the document.
38160 \begin_layout Subsection
38162 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38164 name "subsec:Toolbars"
38169 \begin_inset Index idx
38172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38181 \begin_layout Standard
38182 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
38184 All toolbars and the
38187 \begin_inset space ~
38192 can be turned on and off.
38197 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
38209 \begin_inset space ~
38221 \begin_inset space ~
38226 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
38230 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
38237 \begin_layout Standard
38242 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
38246 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
38247 or when a certain feature is enabled.
38248 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
38249 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
38250 is inside a formula or table respectively.
38253 \begin_layout Standard
38255 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
38256 \begin_inset space ~
38260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38262 reference "sec:Toolbars"
38269 \begin_layout Subsection
38273 \begin_layout Standard
38277 \begin_inset space ~
38281 \begin_inset space ~
38285 \begin_inset space ~
38289 \begin_inset space ~
38293 \begin_inset space ~
38297 \begin_inset space ~
38302 will split \SpecialChar LyX
38303 's main window vertically while
38306 \begin_inset space ~
38310 \begin_inset space ~
38314 \begin_inset space ~
38318 \begin_inset space ~
38322 \begin_inset space ~
38326 \begin_inset space ~
38331 will split it horizontally.
38332 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
38333 to view the same document, but at different positions.
38334 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
38335 three or more documents at the same time.
38336 To close a split view, use the menu
38339 \begin_inset space ~
38343 \begin_inset space ~
38351 \begin_layout Subsection
38355 \begin_layout Standard
38356 Closes a split view.
38359 \begin_layout Subsection
38363 \begin_layout Standard
38364 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
38365 so that you will see nothing but your text.
38366 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
38367 's main window fullscreen.
38368 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
38369 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
38372 \begin_layout Section
38374 \begin_inset Index idx
38377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38386 \begin_layout Subsection
38390 \begin_layout Standard
38391 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
38392 \begin_inset space ~
38396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38398 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
38409 \begin_layout Subsection
38411 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38413 name "subsec:Special-Character"
38420 \begin_layout Standard
38421 Here you can insert the following characters:
38424 \begin_layout Description
38429 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
38432 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
38433 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38434 -packages you have installed.
38435 You can get a complete display by checking
38438 \begin_inset space ~
38444 \begin_inset Newline newline
38448 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38456 Not all characters will be visible in the
38460 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
38461 dialog (see section
38462 \begin_inset space ~
38466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38468 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
38472 ) can display every character.
38480 \begin_layout Description
38481 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
38485 \begin_layout Description
38487 \begin_inset space ~
38491 \begin_inset space ~
38494 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
38495 \begin_inset space ~
38499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38501 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
38508 \begin_layout Description
38510 \begin_inset space ~
38513 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
38516 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38517 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38523 \begin_layout Description
38525 \begin_inset space ~
38528 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
38531 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38532 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38538 \begin_layout Description
38540 \begin_inset space ~
38543 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
38547 \begin_layout Description
38549 \begin_inset space ~
38552 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
38556 \begin_layout Description
38558 \begin_inset space ~
38561 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
38567 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38573 \begin_layout Description
38575 \begin_inset space ~
38578 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
38582 \begin_layout Description
38584 \begin_inset space ~
38588 \begin_inset Index idx
38591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38598 \begin_inset Index idx
38601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38602 Language ! Phonetic symbols
38607 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
38608 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
38610 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38616 \begin_inset Index idx
38619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38627 \begin_inset Newline newline
38630 More information about this feature can be found in the
38636 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
38642 \begin_layout Description
38643 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
38645 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
38646 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
38650 \begin_layout Subsection
38654 \begin_layout Standard
38655 Opens a submenu with the following options:
38658 \begin_layout Description
38659 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
38660 \begin_inset script superscript
38662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38671 \begin_layout Description
38672 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
38673 \begin_inset script subscript
38675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38684 \begin_layout Description
38686 \begin_inset space ~
38689 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
38690 \begin_inset space ~
38694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38696 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
38703 \begin_layout Description
38705 \begin_inset space ~
38708 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
38709 \begin_inset space ~
38713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38715 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
38722 \begin_layout Description
38724 \begin_inset space ~
38727 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
38728 \begin_inset space ~
38732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38734 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
38741 \begin_layout Description
38743 \begin_inset space ~
38746 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
38748 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38752 \begin_inset space \space{}
38755 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
38756 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
38762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38765 To insert a fraction use the command
38770 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38774 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
38780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38783 The visible space is hereby the character before the
38790 \begin_layout Description
38792 \begin_inset space ~
38795 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
38796 \begin_inset space ~
38800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38802 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
38809 \begin_layout Description
38811 \begin_inset space ~
38814 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
38815 \begin_inset space ~
38819 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38821 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
38828 \begin_layout Description
38830 \begin_inset space ~
38833 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
38834 \begin_inset space ~
38838 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38840 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
38847 \begin_layout Description
38848 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
38849 \begin_inset space ~
38853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38855 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
38862 \begin_layout Description
38864 \begin_inset space ~
38867 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
38868 \begin_inset space ~
38872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38874 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
38881 \begin_layout Description
38883 \begin_inset space ~
38886 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
38887 \begin_inset space ~
38891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38893 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
38900 \begin_layout Description
38902 \begin_inset space ~
38906 \begin_inset space ~
38909 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
38912 \begin_inset space ~
38916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38918 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
38925 for a usage example.
38928 \begin_layout Description
38930 \begin_inset space ~
38934 \begin_inset space ~
38937 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
38938 \begin_inset space ~
38942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38944 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38951 \begin_layout Description
38953 \begin_inset space ~
38956 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
38957 as described in section
38958 \begin_inset space ~
38962 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38964 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38971 \begin_layout Description
38973 \begin_inset space ~
38976 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
38977 \begin_inset space ~
38981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38983 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
38990 \begin_layout Description
38992 \begin_inset space ~
38995 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
38996 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
38998 \begin_inset space ~
39002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39004 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
39011 \begin_layout Description
39013 \begin_inset space ~
39016 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
39017 \begin_inset space ~
39021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39023 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39030 \begin_layout Description
39032 \begin_inset space ~
39036 \begin_inset space ~
39039 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
39040 \begin_inset space ~
39044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39046 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39053 \begin_layout Subsection
39057 \begin_layout Standard
39058 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
39062 \begin_inset space ~
39083 are described in section
39084 \begin_inset space ~
39088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39090 reference "sec:toc"
39099 is described in section
39100 \begin_inset space ~
39104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39106 reference "sec:Index"
39114 is described in section
39115 \begin_inset space ~
39119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39121 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39127 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39130 is described in section
39131 \begin_inset space ~
39135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39137 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
39144 \begin_layout Subsection
39148 \begin_layout Standard
39149 To insert floats, as described in section
39150 \begin_inset space ~
39154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39156 reference "sec:Floats"
39160 and in detail the chapter
39167 \begin_inset space ~
39175 \begin_layout Subsection
39179 \begin_layout Standard
39180 To insert notes, described in section
39181 \begin_inset space ~
39185 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39187 reference "sec:Notes"
39194 \begin_layout Subsection
39198 \begin_layout Standard
39199 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
39201 Branches are described in section
39202 \begin_inset space ~
39206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39208 reference "sec:Branches"
39215 \begin_layout Subsection
39219 \begin_layout Standard
39220 Inserts document class-specific insets.
39221 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
39223 An example is the document class
39224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39231 with three custom insets.
39234 Flex insets and InsetLayout
39238 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
39244 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
39247 \begin_layout Subsection
39249 \begin_inset Index idx
39252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39261 \begin_layout Standard
39262 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
39264 For more information see chapter
39266 External Document Parts
39269 \begin_inset space ~
39275 \begin_layout Subsection
39277 \begin_inset Index idx
39280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39289 \begin_layout Standard
39290 Inserts a box in a certain style.
39291 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
39298 \begin_inset space ~
39306 \begin_layout Subsection
39310 \begin_layout Standard
39315 dialog as described in section
39316 \begin_inset space ~
39320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39322 reference "sec:Bibliography"
39329 \begin_layout Subsection
39333 \begin_layout Standard
39338 as described in section
39339 \begin_inset space ~
39343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39345 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39352 \begin_layout Subsection
39356 \begin_layout Standard
39361 as described in section
39362 \begin_inset space ~
39366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39368 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39375 \begin_layout Subsection
39377 \begin_inset Index idx
39380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39387 \begin_inset Index idx
39390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39391 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
39399 \begin_layout Standard
39400 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
39401 Floats are described in section
39402 \begin_inset space ~
39406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39408 reference "sec:Floats"
39412 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
39414 Multi-page Captions
39419 \begin_inset space ~
39427 \begin_layout Subsection
39431 \begin_layout Standard
39432 Inserts an index entry as described in section
39433 \begin_inset space ~
39437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39439 reference "sec:Index"
39446 \begin_layout Subsection
39450 \begin_layout Standard
39451 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
39452 \begin_inset space ~
39456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39458 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39465 \begin_layout Subsection
39469 \begin_layout Standard
39470 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
39471 Tables are described in section
39472 \begin_inset space ~
39476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39478 reference "sec:Tables"
39482 and in detail in the chapter
39489 \begin_inset space ~
39497 \begin_layout Subsection
39501 \begin_layout Standard
39507 Graphics are described in section
39508 \begin_inset space ~
39512 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39514 reference "sec:Graphics"
39521 \begin_layout Subsection
39525 \begin_layout Standard
39526 Inserts a URL as described in section
39527 \begin_inset space ~
39531 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39533 reference "subsec:URLs"
39540 \begin_layout Subsection
39544 \begin_layout Standard
39545 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
39546 \begin_inset space ~
39550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39552 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
39559 \begin_layout Subsection
39563 \begin_layout Standard
39564 Inserts a footnote as described in section
39565 \begin_inset space ~
39569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39571 reference "sec:Footnotes"
39578 \begin_layout Subsection
39582 \begin_layout Standard
39583 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
39584 \begin_inset space ~
39588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39590 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
39597 \begin_layout Subsection
39600 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
39603 \begin_layout Standard
39604 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
39605 environments of the same type.
39607 \begin_inset space ~
39611 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39613 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
39617 for an explanation.
39620 \begin_layout Subsection
39624 \begin_layout Standard
39625 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
39626 title or caption of a float.
39627 Inserts a short title as described in section
39628 \begin_inset space ~
39632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39634 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
39641 \begin_layout Subsection
39646 \begin_layout Standard
39647 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
39648 Code box as described in section
39649 \begin_inset space ~
39653 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39655 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39662 \begin_layout Subsection
39664 \begin_inset Index idx
39667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39676 \begin_layout Standard
39677 Inserts a program listings box.
39678 Program listings are explained in the chapter
39680 Program Code Listings
39685 \begin_inset space ~
39693 \begin_layout Subsection
39697 \begin_layout Standard
39698 Inserts the actual date.
39699 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
39704 \begin_layout Subsection
39708 \begin_layout Standard
39709 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
39710 \begin_inset space ~
39714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39716 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39723 \begin_layout Section
39725 \begin_inset Index idx
39728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39737 \begin_layout Standard
39738 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
39739 \begin_inset space ~
39742 of the current document.
39743 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
39746 \begin_layout Subsection
39750 \begin_layout Standard
39751 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
39752 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
39753 to jump, for example, between section
39754 \begin_inset space ~
39758 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
39759 \begin_inset space ~
39762 2.5 and use the submenu
39765 \begin_inset space ~
39769 \begin_inset space ~
39776 \begin_inset space ~
39782 \begin_inset space ~
39786 \begin_inset space ~
39792 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
39796 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
39802 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
39805 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
39808 \begin_layout Standard
39809 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
39813 \begin_inset space ~
39818 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
39821 \begin_inset space ~
39826 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
39829 \begin_layout Subsection
39830 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
39833 \begin_layout Standard
39834 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
39838 \begin_layout Subsection
39842 \begin_layout Standard
39843 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
39844 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
39845 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
39849 \begin_inset space ~
39853 \begin_inset space ~
39861 \begin_layout Subsection
39865 \begin_layout Standard
39866 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
39869 The \SpecialChar LyX
39870 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
39872 \begin_inset space ~
39880 \begin_inset space ~
39885 manual for a detailed description.
39888 \begin_layout Section
39890 \begin_inset Index idx
39893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39902 \begin_layout Subsection
39906 \begin_layout Standard
39907 Change Tracking is described in section
39908 \begin_inset space ~
39912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39914 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39921 \begin_layout Subsection
39929 \begin_layout Standard
39930 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
39931 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
39932 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39934 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
39935 to the clipboard or update the view.
39936 \begin_inset Newline newline
39939 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39943 \begin_layout Standard
39946 Open Containing Directory
39948 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
39949 's temporary folder for the document.
39950 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
39951 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
39952 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
39953 For example some journals require to send the
39957 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39961 \begin_layout Subsection
39962 Start Appendix Here
39965 \begin_layout Standard
39966 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
39967 as described in section
39968 \begin_inset space ~
39972 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39974 reference "sec:Appendices"
39981 \begin_layout Subsection
39983 \begin_inset space ~
39989 \begin_layout Standard
39990 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
39991 default output format for the document (menu
39993 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39994 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39995 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
39997 \begin_inset space ~
40001 \begin_inset space ~
40007 \begin_inset space ~
40011 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40013 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40017 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
40020 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40021 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40023 \begin_inset space ~
40026 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40028 \begin_inset space ~
40031 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40033 \begin_inset space ~
40037 \begin_inset space ~
40043 \begin_inset space ~
40047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40049 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40053 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
40054 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40056 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40057 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40059 \begin_inset space ~
40062 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40064 \begin_inset space ~
40067 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40071 \begin_inset space ~
40075 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40077 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40082 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40083 when it is first configured.
40084 The default output format is
40087 \begin_inset space ~
40095 \begin_layout Subsection
40096 View (Other Formats)
40099 \begin_layout Standard
40100 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
40101 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
40102 actual document with an external program.
40103 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
40104 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40105 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
40107 All possible formats are listed in section
40108 \begin_inset space ~
40112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40114 reference "subsec:Export"
40119 You should at least see the menu entry
40124 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40126 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
40128 \begin_inset space ~
40132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40134 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40139 \begin_inset Index idx
40142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40143 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40152 \begin_layout Standard
40153 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
40154 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40156 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40157 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40159 \begin_inset space ~
40162 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40164 \begin_inset space ~
40167 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40171 \begin_inset space ~
40175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40177 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40182 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40183 when it is first configured.
40186 \begin_layout Subsection
40188 \begin_inset space ~
40194 \begin_layout Standard
40195 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
40196 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
40199 \begin_layout Subsection
40200 Update (Other Formats)
40203 \begin_layout Standard
40204 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
40205 your document without opening a new viewer window.
40208 \begin_layout Subsection
40209 View Master Document
40212 \begin_layout Standard
40213 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40229 \begin_inset space ~
40234 manual for more information on this topic).
40235 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
40236 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
40240 \begin_inset space ~
40244 \begin_inset space ~
40249 generates the output of the whole book, while
40253 will just output the chapter alone.
40256 \begin_layout Standard
40257 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40258 in the document settings (menu
40260 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40261 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40262 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40264 \begin_inset space ~
40268 \begin_inset space ~
40274 \begin_inset space ~
40278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40280 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40284 ) or in the preferences (menu
40286 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40287 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40289 \begin_inset space ~
40292 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40294 \begin_inset space ~
40297 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40299 \begin_inset space ~
40303 \begin_inset space ~
40309 \begin_inset space ~
40313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40315 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40322 \begin_layout Subsection
40323 Update Master Document
40326 \begin_layout Standard
40327 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40343 \begin_inset space ~
40348 manual for more information on this topic).
40349 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
40350 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
40353 \begin_layout Standard
40354 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40355 in the document settings (menu
40357 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40358 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40359 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40361 \begin_inset space ~
40365 \begin_inset space ~
40371 \begin_inset space ~
40375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40377 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40381 ) or in the preferences (menu
40383 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40384 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40386 \begin_inset space ~
40389 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40391 \begin_inset space ~
40394 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40396 \begin_inset space ~
40400 \begin_inset space ~
40406 \begin_inset space ~
40410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40412 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40419 \begin_layout Subsection
40421 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40423 name "subsec:Compressed"
40430 \begin_layout Standard
40431 Un/compresses the current document.
40432 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
40433 compression (see the
40435 Additional Features
40437 manual for details).
40440 \begin_layout Subsection
40444 \begin_layout Standard
40445 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
40448 \begin_layout Subsection
40452 \begin_layout Standard
40453 The document settings are described in appendix
40454 \begin_inset space ~
40458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40460 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40467 \begin_layout Section
40469 \begin_inset Index idx
40472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40481 \begin_layout Subsection
40485 \begin_layout Standard
40486 Spell checking is explained in section
40487 \begin_inset space ~
40491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40493 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
40500 \begin_layout Subsection
40504 \begin_layout Standard
40505 The thesaurus is described in section
40506 \begin_inset space ~
40510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40512 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
40519 \begin_layout Subsection
40521 \begin_inset Index idx
40524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40531 \begin_inset Index idx
40534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40543 \begin_layout Standard
40544 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
40545 the highlighted document part.
40548 \begin_layout Subsection
40554 \begin_inset Index idx
40557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40558 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40567 \begin_layout Standard
40568 Generates with the help of the program
40570 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40573 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
40574 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
40575 This feature is not available on Windows.
40578 \begin_layout Subsection
40584 \begin_inset Index idx
40587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40597 \begin_layout Standard
40598 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40603 \begin_inset space ~
40608 to see the full filename paths.
40611 \begin_layout Subsection
40613 \begin_inset Index idx
40616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40625 \begin_layout Standard
40626 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
40627 files as described in section
40628 \begin_inset space ~
40632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40634 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
40641 \begin_layout Subsection
40643 \begin_inset Index idx
40646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40659 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40677 \begin_inset Index idx
40680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40681 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40690 \begin_layout Standard
40691 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
40692 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
40693 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40694 -packages and programs it needs; see
40696 \begin_inset space ~
40700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40702 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40709 \begin_layout Subsection
40713 \begin_layout Standard
40718 dialog as described in detail in appendix
40719 \begin_inset space ~
40723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40725 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
40732 \begin_layout Section
40734 \begin_inset Index idx
40737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40746 \begin_layout Standard
40747 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
40748 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
40750 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
40754 \begin_layout Standard
40758 \begin_inset space ~
40763 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
40764 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40765 packages and classes found
40766 by \SpecialChar LyX
40768 \begin_inset space ~
40772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40774 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
40781 \begin_layout Standard
40785 \begin_inset space ~
40790 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
40795 \begin_layout Section
40797 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40799 name "sec:Toolbars"
40806 \begin_layout Standard
40807 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
40808 \begin_inset space ~
40812 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40814 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
40821 \begin_layout Standard
40822 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
40823 This is described in the
40825 Additional Features
40830 \begin_layout Subsection
40832 \begin_inset Index idx
40835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40844 \begin_layout Standard
40845 \begin_inset Graphics
40846 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
40854 \begin_layout Standard
40855 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40861 \begin_layout Standard
40862 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40879 \begin_inset Note Note
40882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40883 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
40888 manual for more information.
40896 \begin_layout Standard
40897 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40903 \begin_layout Standard
40904 \begin_inset Tabular
40905 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
40906 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40907 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40908 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40914 \begin_inset Graphics
40915 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
40925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40929 pull-down box for the environments
40942 \begin_layout Standard
40943 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
40949 \begin_layout Standard
40951 \begin_inset Tabular
40952 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
40953 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40954 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40955 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40956 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40979 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40986 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41009 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41016 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41039 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41046 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41055 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
41063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41069 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41076 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41085 arg "spelling-continuously"
41093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41097 Spellcheck continuously
41103 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41126 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41133 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41156 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41163 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41186 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41193 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41216 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41223 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41246 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41253 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41262 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
41270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41276 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41278 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41282 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41286 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41295 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41302 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
41310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41316 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41318 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41322 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41326 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41335 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41344 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
41352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41358 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
41359 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
41366 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41387 Emphasize text, function of the
41389 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41391 \begin_inset space ~
41394 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41403 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41424 Set text to noun style, function of the
41426 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41428 \begin_inset space ~
41431 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41440 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41449 arg "textstyle-apply"
41457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41461 Format text using the current settings in the
41463 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41465 \begin_inset space ~
41468 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41477 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41500 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41501 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
41503 \begin_inset space ~
41512 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41521 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
41529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41535 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41542 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41549 arg "tabular-insert"
41557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41563 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41570 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41579 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
41587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41591 Toggle outline window on/off,
41593 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
41600 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41609 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
41617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41621 Toggle math toolbar on/off
41627 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41636 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
41644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41648 Toggle table toolbar on/off
41661 \begin_layout Subsection
41663 \begin_inset Index idx
41666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41675 \begin_layout Standard
41676 \begin_inset Graphics
41677 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
41685 \begin_layout Standard
41686 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41692 \begin_layout Standard
41693 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41697 \begin_layout Standard
41698 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41704 \begin_layout Standard
41705 \begin_inset Tabular
41706 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
41707 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41708 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41709 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41710 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41737 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41746 arg "layout Enumerate"
41754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41764 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41773 arg "layout Itemize"
41781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41791 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41818 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41827 arg "layout Description"
41835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41845 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41854 arg "depth-increment"
41862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41868 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41870 \begin_inset space ~
41874 \begin_inset space ~
41883 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41892 arg "depth-decrement"
41900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41906 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41908 \begin_inset space ~
41912 \begin_inset space ~
41921 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41930 arg "float-insert figure"
41938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41944 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41945 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41952 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41961 arg "float-insert table"
41969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41975 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41976 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41983 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42006 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42013 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42022 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
42030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42036 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42043 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42052 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
42060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42066 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42073 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42096 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42098 \begin_inset space ~
42107 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42116 arg "nomencl-insert"
42124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42130 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42132 \begin_inset space ~
42141 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42150 arg "footnote-insert"
42158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42164 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42171 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42180 arg "marginalnote-insert"
42188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42194 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42196 \begin_inset space ~
42205 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42228 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42229 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
42231 \begin_inset space ~
42240 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42249 arg "box-insert Frameless"
42257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42263 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42270 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42293 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42300 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42323 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42325 \begin_inset space ~
42334 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42343 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
42351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42357 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42358 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
42365 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42374 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
42382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42388 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42389 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42391 \begin_inset space ~
42400 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42409 arg "dialog-show character"
42417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42423 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42425 \begin_inset space ~
42428 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42435 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42444 arg "layout-paragraph"
42452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42458 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42460 \begin_inset space ~
42469 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42478 arg "thesaurus-entry"
42486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42492 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42506 \begin_layout Subsection
42507 View/Update Toolbar
42508 \begin_inset Index idx
42511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42512 Toolbar ! View / Update
42520 \begin_layout Standard
42521 \begin_inset Graphics
42522 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
42529 \begin_layout Standard
42530 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42536 \begin_layout Standard
42537 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42541 \begin_layout Standard
42542 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42548 \begin_layout Standard
42549 \begin_inset Tabular
42550 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
42551 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42552 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42553 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42554 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42577 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42584 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42593 arg "buffer-update"
42601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42607 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42614 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42623 arg "master-buffer-view"
42631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42637 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42639 \begin_inset space ~
42648 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42657 arg "master-buffer-update"
42665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42671 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42673 \begin_inset space ~
42677 \begin_inset space ~
42686 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42695 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
42703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42709 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42710 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42711 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42712 Synchronize with Output
42718 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42741 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42742 View (Other Formats)
42748 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42755 arg "update-others"
42763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42769 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42770 Update (Other Formats)
42783 \begin_layout Standard
42784 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
42788 \begin_layout Subsection
42792 \begin_layout Standard
42793 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
42794 \begin_inset space ~
42798 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42800 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42804 , the table toolbar
42805 \begin_inset Index idx
42808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42817 \begin_inset space ~
42822 manual and the math macro toolbar
42823 \begin_inset Index idx
42826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42839 \begin_layout Chapter
42840 The Document Settings
42841 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42843 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42848 \begin_inset Index idx
42851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42852 Document ! Settings
42860 \begin_layout Standard
42864 \begin_inset space ~
42869 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
42870 is called with the menu
42872 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42876 You can save your document settings as default with the
42878 Save as Document Defaults
42880 button in any dialog.
42881 This will create a template named
42885 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
42886 when you create a new document without
42890 \begin_layout Standard
42895 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
42896 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
42899 \begin_layout Standard
42900 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
42901 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
42902 to find the one you are looking for.
42903 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
42904 the submenus of the dialog.
42906 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42910 \begin_inset space \space{}
42914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42921 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
42922 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
42923 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
42926 \begin_layout Section
42930 \begin_layout Standard
42931 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
42933 Document classes are described in section
42934 \begin_inset space ~
42938 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42940 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
42948 \begin_layout Standard
42952 \begin_inset space ~
42957 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
42962 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
42963 as a layout for a document class.
42964 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
42966 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
42975 \begin_layout Standard
42976 Some classes use special class options by default.
42977 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
42981 and you can decide to use them or not.
42982 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
42983 recommended you leave them untouched.
42988 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42989 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
42994 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42996 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
43001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43002 When you want to use one of the following drivers
43003 \begin_inset Newline newline
43008 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
43011 \begin_inset Newline newline
43014 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43015 distribution, see section
43020 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43022 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
43035 \begin_layout Standard
43040 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
43041 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
43042 in the background if the child document
43043 is opened without its master.
43044 This way child documents are always compilable.
43045 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
43052 \begin_inset space ~
43060 \begin_layout Standard
43061 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43072 \begin_inset Index idx
43075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43077 packages ! prettyref
43083 \begin_inset Index idx
43086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43088 packages ! refstyle
43093 for cross-references, see section
43094 \begin_inset space ~
43098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43100 reference "sec:Cross-References"
43107 \begin_layout Section
43111 \begin_layout Standard
43112 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
43113 Please refer to the section
43116 \begin_inset space ~
43124 \begin_inset space ~
43129 manual for details.
43132 \begin_layout Section
43136 \begin_layout Standard
43137 Modules are explained in section
43138 \begin_inset space ~
43142 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43144 reference "subsec:Modules"
43151 \begin_layout Section
43155 \begin_layout Standard
43157 \begin_inset space ~
43161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43163 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
43170 \begin_layout Section
43174 \begin_layout Standard
43175 The document font settings are described in section
43176 \begin_inset space ~
43180 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43182 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
43189 \begin_layout Section
43193 \begin_layout Standard
43194 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
43206 \begin_inset space ~
43211 and whether it should be a
43214 \begin_inset space ~
43219 can also be specified here.
43222 \begin_layout Standard
43223 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
43224 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
43225 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
43227 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
43230 \begin_layout Standard
43233 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
43236 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
43237 justifies the text on screen.
43238 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
43242 \begin_layout Section
43246 \begin_layout Standard
43247 This dialog is described in sections
43248 \begin_inset space ~
43252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43254 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
43259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43261 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
43268 \begin_layout Section
43272 \begin_layout Standard
43273 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
43274 \begin_inset space ~
43278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43280 reference "subsec:Margins"
43287 \begin_layout Section
43289 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43291 name "sec:Language-encodings"
43296 \begin_inset Index idx
43299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43300 Language ! Encoding
43308 \begin_layout Standard
43309 The document language and quote styles are set here.
43310 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
43311 (the \SpecialChar LyX
43313 is always encoded in utf8).
43314 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
43315 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
43316 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
43317 -command is not known for
43318 a particular character).
43321 \begin_layout Standard
43322 If you use the option
43327 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
43328 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
43329 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43331 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
43332 exactly one encoding.
43333 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
43336 \begin_layout Standard
43338 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
43339 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
43340 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43341 installation supports Unicode), choose
43342 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
43343 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43344 is quite incomplete, so
43345 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
43350 (when \SpecialChar LyX
43351 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43352 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
43353 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43354 -commands is not used, because all
43355 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
43356 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43357 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43358 , two new alternative engines
43359 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43361 Both engines support Unicode natively.
43363 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
43366 \begin_inset space ~
43374 \begin_inset space ~
43382 \begin_inset space ~
43388 \begin_inset space ~
43392 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43394 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
43399 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
43403 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
43406 \begin_layout Standard
43410 \begin_inset space ~
43415 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43416 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
43418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43426 The possible settings are:
43429 \begin_layout Description
43430 Default uses the language package that is selected in
43432 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43433 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43437 \begin_inset space ~
43441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43443 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
43450 \begin_layout Description
43451 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
43452 format you will use.
43453 In many cases this will be
43458 \begin_inset Index idx
43461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43469 If the newer package
43474 \begin_inset Index idx
43477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43479 packages ! polyglossia
43484 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43485 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43486 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
43488 this package will be used instead of
43495 \begin_layout Description
43497 \begin_inset space ~
43508 would be more appropriate.
43511 \begin_layout Description
43512 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
43513 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
43517 (for German texts), type in
43520 \begin_inset Newline newline
43525 usepackage{ngerman}
43528 \begin_layout Description
43529 None will not use a language package.
43530 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
43533 \begin_layout Standard
43534 Here is a list with the important encodings:
43537 \begin_layout Description
43539 \begin_inset space ~
43543 \begin_inset space ~
43547 \begin_inset space ~
43554 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43560 \begin_inset Index idx
43563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43565 packages ! inputenc
43571 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
43572 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
43573 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
43577 \begin_layout Description
43578 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
43580 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
43581 commands, which may result in a big
43582 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
43583 -commands are needed.
43586 \begin_layout Description
43588 \begin_inset space ~
43592 \begin_inset space ~
43595 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
43598 \begin_layout Description
43600 \begin_inset space ~
43604 \begin_inset space ~
43607 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
43610 \begin_layout Description
43612 \begin_inset space ~
43615 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
43618 \begin_layout Description
43620 \begin_inset space ~
43624 \begin_inset space ~
43627 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
43628 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
43631 \begin_layout Description
43633 \begin_inset space ~
43637 \begin_inset space ~
43640 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
43644 \begin_layout Description
43646 \begin_inset space ~
43650 \begin_inset space ~
43653 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
43654 ISO-8859-13 encoding
43657 \begin_layout Description
43659 \begin_inset space ~
43663 \begin_inset space ~
43667 \begin_inset space ~
43670 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
43671 \begin_inset space ~
43677 \begin_layout Description
43679 \begin_inset space ~
43683 \begin_inset space ~
43687 \begin_inset space ~
43690 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
43691 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
43694 \begin_layout Description
43696 \begin_inset space ~
43700 \begin_inset space ~
43703 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
43704 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
43705 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43706 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
43707 \begin_inset space ~
43711 \begin_inset space ~
43717 \begin_layout Description
43719 \begin_inset space ~
43723 \begin_inset space ~
43726 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
43727 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
43728 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43730 should try to use the encoding Unicode
43731 \begin_inset space ~
43735 \begin_inset space ~
43741 \begin_layout Description
43743 \begin_inset space ~
43747 \begin_inset space ~
43750 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
43753 \begin_layout Description
43755 \begin_inset space ~
43759 \begin_inset space ~
43762 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
43765 \begin_layout Description
43767 \begin_inset space ~
43771 \begin_inset space ~
43774 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
43777 \begin_layout Description
43779 \begin_inset space ~
43782 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
43785 \begin_layout Description
43787 \begin_inset space ~
43790 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
43793 \begin_layout Description
43795 \begin_inset space ~
43799 \begin_inset space ~
43802 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
43805 \begin_layout Description
43807 \begin_inset space ~
43811 \begin_inset space ~
43817 \begin_layout Description
43819 \begin_inset space ~
43823 \begin_inset space ~
43826 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
43829 \begin_layout Description
43831 \begin_inset space ~
43835 \begin_inset space ~
43841 \begin_layout Description
43843 \begin_inset space ~
43847 \begin_inset space ~
43850 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43856 \begin_inset Index idx
43859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43866 , when using this, set the document language to
43871 \begin_layout Description
43873 \begin_inset space ~
43877 \begin_inset space ~
43880 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43885 , when using this, set the document language to
43888 \begin_inset space ~
43894 \begin_layout Description
43896 \begin_inset space ~
43900 \begin_inset space ~
43903 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43909 \begin_inset Index idx
43912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43914 packages ! japanese
43919 , when using this, set the document language to
43924 \begin_layout Description
43926 \begin_inset space ~
43930 \begin_inset space ~
43933 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43938 , when using this, set the document language to
43943 \begin_layout Description
43945 \begin_inset space ~
43949 \begin_inset space ~
43952 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43957 , when using this, set the document language to
43962 \begin_layout Description
43964 \begin_inset space ~
43967 (EUC-KR) for Korean
43970 \begin_layout Description
43972 \begin_inset space ~
43976 \begin_inset space ~
43980 \begin_inset space ~
43983 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
43986 \begin_layout Description
43988 \begin_inset space ~
43992 \begin_inset space ~
43996 \begin_inset space ~
43999 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
44000 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
44001 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
44004 \begin_layout Description
44006 \begin_inset space ~
44010 \begin_inset space ~
44016 \begin_layout Description
44018 \begin_inset space ~
44022 \begin_inset space ~
44025 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
44026 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
44029 \begin_layout Description
44031 \begin_inset space ~
44035 \begin_inset space ~
44038 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44044 \begin_inset Index idx
44047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44054 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
44057 \begin_layout Description
44059 \begin_inset space ~
44067 \begin_inset space ~
44070 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
44077 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44080 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44087 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44088 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44090 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
44093 \begin_layout Description
44095 \begin_inset space ~
44099 \begin_inset space ~
44102 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44108 \begin_inset Index idx
44111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44118 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
44121 \begin_layout Description
44123 \begin_inset space ~
44126 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44132 \begin_inset Index idx
44135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44137 packages ! inputenc
44143 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
44147 \begin_layout Description
44149 \begin_inset space ~
44153 \begin_inset space ~
44157 \begin_inset space ~
44160 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
44161 \begin_inset space ~
44167 \begin_layout Description
44169 \begin_inset space ~
44173 \begin_inset space ~
44177 \begin_inset space ~
44180 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
44181 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
44182 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
44186 \begin_layout Description
44188 \begin_inset space ~
44192 \begin_inset space ~
44196 \begin_inset space ~
44199 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
44200 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
44203 \begin_layout Section
44205 \begin_inset Index idx
44208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44215 \begin_inset Index idx
44218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44225 \begin_inset Index idx
44228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44229 Color ! Shaded boxes
44235 \begin_inset Index idx
44238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44239 Color ! Greyed-out notes
44247 \begin_layout Standard
44248 Here you can alter the font color for the
44252 (default: black), for
44255 \begin_inset space ~
44260 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
44264 (default: white) and for
44267 \begin_inset space ~
44277 sets the color back to the default.
44280 \begin_layout Standard
44281 Clicking any button showing
44289 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
44290 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
44291 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
44292 later more quickly.
44295 \begin_layout Standard
44296 Note, if you change the
44299 \begin_inset space ~
44304 font color and use the option
44307 \begin_inset space ~
44312 in the document settings under
44315 \begin_inset space ~
44320 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
44321 \begin_inset space ~
44325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44327 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44334 \begin_layout Standard
44335 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
44341 \begin_layout Standard
44345 \begin_inset space ~
44354 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
44357 \begin_inset space ~
44360 Code after a forced page break:
44363 \begin_layout Itemize
44364 For the page color:
44365 \begin_inset Newline newline
44372 pagecolor{color name}
44375 \begin_layout Itemize
44376 For the text color:
44377 \begin_inset Newline newline
44387 \begin_layout Standard
44388 You are restricted to one of
44424 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
44431 \begin_inset space ~
44437 \begin_inset Newline newline
44440 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
44441 names to refer to them:
44444 \begin_layout Itemize
44450 \begin_inset Newline newline
44455 page_backgroundcolor
44458 \begin_layout Itemize
44462 \begin_inset space ~
44468 \begin_inset Newline newline
44476 \begin_layout Itemize
44480 \begin_inset space ~
44486 \begin_inset Newline newline
44494 \begin_layout Itemize
44498 \begin_inset space ~
44504 \begin_inset Newline newline
44512 \begin_layout Standard
44513 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
44516 \begin_inset space ~
44524 \begin_inset space ~
44532 \begin_layout Section
44536 \begin_layout Standard
44537 Here you can adjust the
44541 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
44545 as described in section
44546 \begin_inset space ~
44550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44552 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
44559 \begin_layout Section
44563 \begin_layout Standard
44564 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44570 \begin_inset Index idx
44573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44575 packages ! biblatex
44585 \begin_inset Index idx
44588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44600 \begin_inset Index idx
44603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44611 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44614 Sectioned bibliography
44616 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44622 \begin_inset Index idx
44625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44627 packages ! bibtopic
44637 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
44638 Finally, you can select a document-specific
44642 for the generation of the bibliography.
44643 For a further description of these possibilities see section
44644 \begin_inset space ~
44648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44650 reference "sec:Bibliography"
44657 \begin_layout Section
44661 \begin_layout Standard
44662 Here you can define the
44666 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
44668 \begin_inset space ~
44672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44674 reference "sec:Index"
44681 \begin_layout Section
44685 \begin_layout Standard
44686 The PDF properties are explained in section
44687 \begin_inset space ~
44691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44693 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44700 \begin_layout Section
44704 \begin_layout Standard
44705 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
44706 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44712 \begin_inset Index idx
44715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44727 \begin_inset Index idx
44730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44742 \begin_inset Index idx
44745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44757 \begin_inset Index idx
44760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44772 \begin_inset Index idx
44775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44777 packages ! mathdots
44787 \begin_inset Index idx
44790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44792 packages ! mathtools
44802 \begin_inset Index idx
44805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44817 \begin_inset Index idx
44820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44822 packages ! stackrel
44832 \begin_inset Index idx
44835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44837 packages ! stmaryrd
44847 \begin_inset Index idx
44850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44852 packages ! undertilde
44857 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
44860 \begin_layout Description
44861 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44862 -errors in formulas,
44863 ensure that you have this enabled.
44866 \begin_layout Description
44867 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
44868 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44869 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
44873 \begin_layout Description
44874 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
44877 \begin_inset space ~
44889 \begin_layout Description
44890 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
44893 \begin_inset space ~
44905 \begin_layout Description
44906 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
44917 \begin_layout Description
44918 mathtools is used for the math commands
44954 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
44961 \begin_layout Description
44962 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
44964 Chemical Symbols and Equations
44973 \begin_layout Description
44974 stackrel is used for the math command
44991 \begin_layout Description
44992 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
44995 \begin_layout Description
44996 undertilde is used for the math command
45004 Accents for one Character
45013 \begin_layout Section
45017 \begin_layout Standard
45018 The float placement options are described in the section
45021 \begin_inset space ~
45029 \begin_inset space ~
45037 \begin_layout Section
45041 \begin_layout Standard
45042 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
45044 Program Code Listings
45049 \begin_inset space ~
45057 \begin_layout Section
45061 \begin_layout Standard
45062 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
45070 set to be used and set the
45075 The itemize environment is described in section
45076 \begin_inset space ~
45080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45082 reference "sec:Itemize"
45089 \begin_layout Standard
45090 You can furthermore specify a
45093 \begin_inset space ~
45098 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45099 command of the desired character.
45100 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
45107 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
45109 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45113 \begin_inset space \space{}
45117 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
45127 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
45128 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
45131 \begin_layout Standard
45132 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45140 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45141 -packages in the preamble (menu
45144 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45145 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45148 \begin_inset space ~
45154 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
45158 usepackage{textcomp}
45161 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
45165 usepackage{amssymb}
45175 \begin_layout Section
45179 \begin_layout Standard
45180 Branches are described in section
45181 \begin_inset space ~
45185 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45187 reference "sec:Branches"
45194 \begin_layout Section
45196 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45198 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
45205 \begin_layout Standard
45206 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
45209 \begin_layout Description
45211 \begin_inset space ~
45215 \begin_inset space ~
45218 Format: The format that is used when you enter
45219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45238 View Master Document
45239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45246 Update Master Document
45247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45254 menu or the toolbar.
45255 The default is set in
45257 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45258 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45260 \begin_inset space ~
45263 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
45267 \begin_inset space ~
45271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45273 reference "sec:File-Formats"
45280 \begin_layout Description
45282 \begin_inset space ~
45286 \begin_inset space ~
45289 Output settings for the menu
45291 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45293 \begin_inset space ~
45299 For a detailed description see section
45301 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45306 \begin_inset space ~
45314 \begin_layout Description
45316 \begin_inset space ~
45320 \begin_inset space ~
45323 Options offers settings for the export format
45331 \begin_inset space ~
45336 will assure that the output follows exactly version
45337 \begin_inset space ~
45340 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
45344 \begin_inset space ~
45349 settings are described in detail in section
45351 Math Output in XHTML
45356 \begin_inset space ~
45365 \begin_inset space ~
45369 \begin_inset space ~
45374 is used for the size of equations in the output.
45377 \begin_layout Description
45379 \begin_inset space ~
45384 Save transient properties
45386 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
45387 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
45388 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
45392 \begin_layout Itemize
45393 the activation of change tracking
45396 \begin_layout Itemize
45397 the output of tracked changes
45400 \begin_layout Itemize
45401 the recording of the document directory path.
45404 \begin_layout Standard
45405 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
45406 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
45410 \begin_layout Section
45418 \begin_layout Standard
45419 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45421 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
45423 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45425 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
45429 \begin_layout Standard
45430 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45431 -syntax is given in section
45432 \begin_inset space ~
45436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45438 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
45445 \begin_layout Chapter
45451 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45453 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
45458 \begin_inset Index idx
45461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45470 \begin_layout Standard
45471 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
45473 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45477 It has the following submenus.
45480 \begin_layout Section
45484 \begin_layout Subsection
45488 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45489 User Interface File
45490 \begin_inset Index idx
45493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45494 Customization ! of toolbars
45500 \begin_inset Index idx
45503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45504 Customization ! of menus
45512 \begin_layout Standard
45513 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
45514 interface (ui) file.
45515 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
45523 \begin_layout Description
45528 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
45531 \begin_layout Description
45538 the menu entries in popup context menus
45541 \begin_layout Description
45546 specifies the toolbar buttons
45549 \begin_layout Standard
45550 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
45551 and edit the entries.
45554 \begin_layout Standard
45555 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
45567 entries must be finished with an explicit
45592 and in the case of the
45593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45605 The syntax for the entries is:
45608 \begin_layout Standard
45609 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45638 \begin_layout Standard
45640 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45643 All the \SpecialChar LyX
45644 -functions are listed in the menu
45646 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
45648 \begin_inset space ~
45656 \begin_layout Standard
45657 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45663 \begin_layout Standard
45664 For example, assuming you use the menu
45666 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45669 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
45673 \begin_layout Standard
45674 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45698 \begin_layout Standard
45700 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45715 to have the sixth bookmark.
45718 \begin_layout Standard
45722 \begin_inset space ~
45727 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
45728 's toolbar buttons.
45729 The currently available icon sets are compared in
45730 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45733 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
45741 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45745 \begin_layout Standard
45748 Enable tool tips in main work area
45750 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
45754 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45758 \begin_layout Standard
45763 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
45764 should display in the menu
45766 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45768 \begin_inset space ~
45776 \begin_layout Subsection
45780 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45784 \begin_layout Standard
45787 Restore window layouts and geometries
45790 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
45791 the last \SpecialChar LyX
45795 \begin_layout Standard
45798 Restore cursor positions
45800 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
45804 \begin_layout Standard
45807 Load opened files from last session
45809 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
45813 \begin_layout Standard
45816 Clear all session information
45818 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
45819 sessions (cursor positions, names
45820 of last opened documents, etc.).
45823 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45825 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45827 name "subsec:Backup documents"
45832 \begin_inset Index idx
45835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45844 \begin_layout Standard
45847 Backup original documents when saving
45849 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
45850 it was saved the last time.
45851 It is stored in the
45854 \begin_inset space ~
45860 \begin_inset space ~
45864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45866 reference "sec:Paths"
45870 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
45873 \begin_inset space ~
45879 The backup file has the file extension
45880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45894 \begin_layout Standard
45897 Backup documents, every
45899 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
45902 \begin_layout Standard
45905 Save documents compressed by default
45907 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
45908 \begin_inset space ~
45912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45914 reference "subsec:Compressed"
45919 This applies to newly created documents only.
45920 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
45923 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45924 Windows & work area
45927 \begin_layout Standard
45930 Open documents in tabs
45932 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
45936 \begin_layout Standard
45941 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
45946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45948 \begin_inset space ~
45952 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45954 reference "sec:Paths"
45958 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
45965 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
45966 documents will be opened in the same running instance
45967 of \SpecialChar LyX
45969 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
45970 instance is created for each file.
45973 \begin_layout Standard
45976 Single close-tab button
45978 is checked, there will only be one close button (
45988 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
45989 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
45990 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
45994 \begin_layout Standard
45995 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46003 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
46004 before the change takes effect.
46012 \begin_layout Standard
46017 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
46019 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
46021 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
46025 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
46026 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
46027 and only want to close the view in once instance.
46030 \begin_layout Subsection
46032 \begin_inset Index idx
46035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46042 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46044 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
46051 \begin_layout Standard
46052 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
46056 \begin_layout Standard
46057 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46065 This section only deals with the fonts
46069 the \SpecialChar LyX
46071 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
46074 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46075 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46086 \begin_layout Standard
46087 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
46104 (depends on the system) as its
46107 \begin_inset space ~
46123 \begin_layout Standard
46124 You can change the font size with the
46131 \begin_layout Standard
46136 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
46138 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46141 points have the size of 1
46142 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46146 \begin_inset space ~
46150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46152 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
46157 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
46158 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46162 The sizes are explained in detail in section
46163 \begin_inset space ~
46167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46169 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
46176 \begin_layout Standard
46179 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
46181 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
46182 needs to redraw the screen less often.
46183 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
46184 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
46185 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
46187 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
46188 \begin_inset space ~
46194 \begin_layout Subsection
46196 \begin_inset Index idx
46199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46200 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
46207 \begin_inset Index idx
46210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46219 \begin_layout Standard
46220 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
46221 by choosing an item in the
46222 list and selecting the
46229 \begin_layout Standard
46230 By checking the option
46234 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
46237 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
46238 \begin_inset space ~
46242 \begin_inset space ~
46247 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
46250 \begin_layout Subsection
46252 \begin_inset Index idx
46255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46264 \begin_layout Standard
46265 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
46269 \begin_layout Standard
46274 enables previewing snippets of your document.
46275 This feature is described in section
46276 \begin_inset space ~
46280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46282 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
46289 \begin_layout Standard
46290 Checking the option
46293 \begin_inset space ~
46297 \begin_inset space ~
46301 \begin_inset space ~
46306 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
46309 \begin_layout Section
46311 \begin_inset Index idx
46314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46323 \begin_layout Subsection
46327 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46331 \begin_layout Standard
46334 Cursor follows scrollbar
46336 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
46340 \begin_layout Standard
46341 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
46342 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
46343 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
46346 \begin_layout Standard
46349 Scroll below end of document
46351 is self-explanatory.
46354 \begin_layout Standard
46355 In \SpecialChar LyX
46356 one can jump from word to word by pressing
46363 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
46365 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
46366 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
46369 \begin_layout Standard
46372 Sort environments alphabetically
46374 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46377 \begin_layout Standard
46380 Group environments by their category
46382 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46385 \begin_layout Standard
46390 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
46401 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46405 \begin_layout Standard
46406 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
46411 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
46412 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
46416 \begin_layout Subsection
46418 \begin_inset Index idx
46421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46428 \begin_inset Index idx
46431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46432 Settings ! Shortcuts
46440 \begin_layout Standard
46445 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
46447 Several binding files are available, among them:
46450 \begin_layout Description
46451 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
46454 \begin_layout Description
46455 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
46467 \begin_layout Description
46468 mac.bind a set of bindings for
46471 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46479 \begin_layout Standard
46480 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
46485 , and binding files for special languages.
46486 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
46487 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46491 \begin_inset space \space{}
46495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46503 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
46504 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
46505 will try to use the appropriate binding
46509 \begin_layout Standard
46510 Some binding files, like
46514 , only have a limited scope.
46515 When looking at the end of the file
46519 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
46522 \begin_layout Standard
46526 \begin_inset space ~
46530 \begin_inset space ~
46535 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
46536 in the selected key binding file.
46539 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46541 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46543 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
46548 \begin_inset Index idx
46551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46552 Key Bindings ! Editing
46560 \begin_layout Standard
46561 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
46562 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
46563 functions and the bound shortcuts.
46564 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
46567 Show key-bindings containing
46570 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
46571 Insert there for example as keyword
46572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46579 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
46580 functions that contain
46581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46589 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
46590 All \SpecialChar LyX
46591 functions are also listed in the file
46596 that you will find in the
46603 \begin_layout Standard
46604 For example, to add the shortcut
46612 , select the function and press the
46617 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
46618 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
46621 \begin_layout Standard
46622 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
46623 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
46625 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
46626 function names as a semicolon separated list.
46628 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
46633 \begin_layout Standard
46634 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
46637 \begin_layout Standard
46638 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
46640 The syntax of the entries is:
46643 \begin_layout Standard
46649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46668 \begin_layout Standard
46669 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
46670 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
46671 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46698 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
46699 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
46700 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
46701 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
46703 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
46707 , you needed to specify it as
46712 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
46715 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
46718 \begin_layout Subsection
46720 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46722 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
46727 \begin_inset Index idx
46730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46737 \begin_inset Index idx
46740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46741 Settings ! Keyboard Map
46749 \begin_layout Standard
46750 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
46751 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
46752 provides keyboard maps.
46753 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
46754 is a Romanian one, you can enable
46757 \begin_inset space ~
46761 \begin_inset space ~
46766 and select the keyboard map file named
46773 \begin_layout Standard
46782 keyboard map and, if you use the
46786 bindings, you can select the first and second with
46789 arg "keymap-primary"
46795 arg "keymap-secondary"
46798 respectively or toggle between them with
46801 arg "keymap-toggle"
46807 \begin_layout Standard
46808 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46816 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
46825 \begin_layout Standard
46826 You can also specify the mouse
46828 Wheel scrolling speed
46831 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
46835 Middle mouse button pasting
46837 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
46838 inserts the content of the clipboard.
46841 \begin_layout Standard
46849 \begin_inset space ~
46853 \begin_inset space ~
46858 you can select a key for zooming.
46859 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
46862 \begin_layout Subsection
46866 \begin_layout Standard
46867 Input completion is described in section
46868 \begin_inset space ~
46872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46874 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
46881 \begin_layout Section
46883 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46890 \begin_inset Index idx
46893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46900 \begin_inset Index idx
46903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46912 \begin_layout Standard
46913 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
46914 are normally determined during
46916 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
46919 \begin_layout Description
46921 \begin_inset space ~
46924 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
46925 's working directory.
46926 It is the default when you
46937 \begin_inset space ~
46945 \begin_layout Description
46947 \begin_inset space ~
46950 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
46952 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46954 \begin_inset space ~
46958 \begin_inset space ~
46966 \begin_layout Description
46968 \begin_inset space ~
46971 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
46977 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46981 \begin_inset Newline newline
46985 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46997 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
46998 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
47006 \begin_layout Description
47008 \begin_inset space ~
47012 \begin_inset Index idx
47015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47021 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
47022 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
47023 \begin_inset space ~
47027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47029 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47037 will be used to save the backups.
47038 \begin_inset Newline newline
47041 Backup files have the ending
47042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47052 \begin_layout Description
47054 \begin_inset space ~
47057 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
47058 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
47060 \begin_inset Newline newline
47067 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47073 You can edit this file with the program
47082 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
47083 in its preferences under
47086 \begin_inset space ~
47092 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
47097 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
47099 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
47100 in your \SpecialChar LyX
47106 and \SpecialChar LyX
47107 need to be running the same time.
47108 \begin_inset Newline newline
47111 The pipe is also used for the
47115 feature, see section
47116 \begin_inset space ~
47120 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47122 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47127 \begin_inset Newline newline
47130 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
47131 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
47132 \begin_inset Newline newline
47148 \begin_layout Description
47150 \begin_inset space ~
47153 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
47156 \begin_layout Description
47158 \begin_inset space ~
47161 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
47162 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
47163 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
47166 \begin_layout Description
47168 \begin_inset space ~
47171 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
47177 You only need to specify it if you are using
47181 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
47183 For \SpecialChar LyX
47188 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
47192 \begin_layout Description
47194 \begin_inset space ~
47197 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
47198 When \SpecialChar LyX
47199 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
47200 to find it on the system.
47201 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
47203 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
47205 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47212 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
47213 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
47216 \begin_layout Description
47218 \begin_inset space ~
47221 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
47222 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
47223 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
47224 code or in the document
47226 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
47228 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
47229 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
47230 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
47231 scanned for the input files.
47232 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
47233 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
47235 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
47236 compilation may fail for some documents.
47239 \begin_layout Section
47243 \begin_layout Standard
47244 Here you can insert your
47253 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
47255 \begin_inset space ~
47259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47261 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47265 , to mark changes you make as yours.
47268 \begin_layout Section
47270 \begin_inset Index idx
47273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47274 Language ! Settings
47280 \begin_inset Index idx
47283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47284 Settings ! Language
47292 \begin_layout Subsection
47294 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47296 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
47303 \begin_layout Description
47305 \begin_inset space ~
47309 \begin_inset space ~
47312 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
47314 You can find its actual translation status here:
47315 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47317 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
47325 \begin_layout Description
47327 \begin_inset space ~
47330 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
47331 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
47332 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
47333 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
47334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47350 The most widespread language package is
47355 \begin_inset Index idx
47358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47365 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
47367 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47368 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47369 come with the alternative
47375 \begin_inset Index idx
47378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47380 packages ! polyglossia
47385 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
47386 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
47392 The available selections are described in section
47393 \begin_inset space ~
47397 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47399 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
47406 \begin_layout Description
47408 \begin_inset space ~
47411 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47412 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
47413 you can here specify the command to start the package.
47414 An example is the start command
47420 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
47422 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
47426 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47442 selectlanguage{$$lang}
47447 \begin_layout Description
47449 \begin_inset space ~
47457 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
47458 command toggles the package on and off.
47461 \begin_layout Description
47463 \begin_inset space ~
47467 \begin_inset space ~
47470 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
47474 \begin_layout Description
47476 \begin_inset space ~
47480 \begin_inset space ~
47483 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
47487 \begin_layout Description
47489 \begin_inset space ~
47493 \begin_inset space ~
47496 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
47497 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
47498 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
47500 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
47507 \begin_layout Description
47509 \begin_inset space ~
47512 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
47514 When this option is not set, the
47517 \begin_inset space ~
47522 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47524 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
47527 \begin_inset space ~
47535 \begin_layout Description
47537 \begin_inset space ~
47543 \begin_inset space ~
47549 When it is not set, the
47552 \begin_inset space ~
47557 is set to the end of the document.
47560 \begin_layout Description
47562 \begin_inset space ~
47566 \begin_inset space ~
47569 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
47570 language will be underlined in blue.
47573 \begin_layout Description
47575 \begin_inset space ~
47579 \begin_inset space ~
47582 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
47583 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
47586 \begin_layout Description
47588 \begin_inset space ~
47591 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
47592 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
47593 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
47594 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
47597 \begin_layout Subsection
47601 \begin_layout Standard
47602 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
47603 \begin_inset space ~
47607 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47609 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
47616 \begin_layout Section
47620 \begin_layout Subsection
47622 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47624 name "subsec:General-output"
47631 \begin_layout Description
47633 \begin_inset space ~
47636 search Commands that will be used for the menu
47638 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47640 \begin_inset space ~
47646 For a detailed description see section
47648 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47653 \begin_inset space ~
47661 \begin_layout Description
47663 \begin_inset space ~
47666 Options Options for the program
47670 that is used for the export format
47675 \begin_inset space ~
47679 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47681 reference "subsec:Export"
47686 Possible options are listed in the
47691 \begin_inset Newline newline
47695 \begin_inset Flex URL
47698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47700 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
47710 \begin_layout Description
47712 \begin_inset space ~
47716 \begin_inset space ~
47719 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
47722 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47723 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
47725 \begin_inset space ~
47731 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
47734 \begin_layout Description
47736 \begin_inset space ~
47740 \begin_inset Index idx
47743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47750 \begin_inset Index idx
47753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47754 Settings ! Date format
47759 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
47760 \begin_inset Newline newline
47764 \begin_inset Flex URL
47767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47769 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
47775 \begin_inset Newline newline
47778 For example the format
47779 \begin_inset Newline newline
47783 \begin_inset Newline newline
47786 prints the date as day/month/year.
47789 \begin_layout Description
47791 \begin_inset space ~
47795 \begin_inset space ~
47798 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
47799 is allowed to overwrite on export.
47802 \begin_layout Subsection
47808 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47810 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
47815 \begin_inset Index idx
47818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47819 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
47828 \begin_layout Description
47830 \begin_inset space ~
47838 \begin_inset space ~
47842 \begin_inset space ~
47845 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
47850 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
47871 are used for Cyrillic.
47872 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
47873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47885 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
47887 sets up in the background.
47888 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
47891 \begin_layout Description
47893 \begin_inset space ~
47897 \begin_inset space ~
47901 \begin_inset space ~
47905 \begin_inset space ~
47908 options They only have an effect when the program
47912 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
47915 \begin_layout Standard
47916 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
47917 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
47918 manuals of the applications.
47921 \begin_layout Description
47923 \begin_inset space ~
47926 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
47927 \begin_inset space ~
47931 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47933 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
47940 \begin_layout Description
47942 \begin_inset space ~
47945 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
47946 \begin_inset space ~
47950 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47952 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
47959 \begin_layout Description
47961 \begin_inset space ~
47964 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
47965 \begin_inset space ~
47969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47971 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
47978 \begin_layout Description
47984 \begin_inset space ~
47987 command Command for the program
47989 Check\SpecialChar TeX
47992 that is described in the section
47994 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
47999 Additional Features
48004 \begin_layout Standard
48005 There are additionally the following options:
48008 \begin_layout Description
48010 \begin_inset space ~
48014 \begin_inset space ~
48018 \begin_inset space ~
48022 \begin_inset space ~
48027 \begin_inset space ~
48030 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
48031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48048 to separate folders.
48049 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
48051 \begin_inset Index idx
48054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48061 \begin_inset Index idx
48064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48073 \begin_layout Description
48075 \begin_inset space ~
48079 \begin_inset space ~
48083 \begin_inset space ~
48087 \begin_inset space ~
48091 \begin_inset space ~
48095 \begin_inset space ~
48098 changes Removes all manually set
48104 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48105 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48107 \begin_inset space ~
48112 dialog when changing the document class.
48115 \begin_layout Section
48117 \begin_inset space ~
48121 \begin_inset Index idx
48124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48133 \begin_layout Subsection
48135 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48137 name "subsec:Converters"
48142 \begin_inset Index idx
48145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48154 \begin_layout Standard
48155 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
48156 from one format to another.
48157 You can modify converters or create new ones.
48158 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
48165 \begin_inset space ~
48170 field and press the
48175 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
48179 \begin_inset space ~
48184 drop-down list, modify the
48188 field and press the
48195 \begin_layout Standard
48198 Converter File Cache
48204 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
48206 Maximum Age (in days
48209 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
48210 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
48213 \begin_layout Standard
48214 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
48215 definition, is described in the section
48226 \begin_layout Subsection
48228 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48230 name "sec:File-Formats"
48235 \begin_inset Index idx
48238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48245 \begin_inset Index idx
48248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48257 \begin_layout Standard
48258 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
48268 programs that should be used for certain formats.
48271 \begin_layout Standard
48272 You can also define the
48274 Default output format
48276 that is used when you use
48278 View, Update, View Master Document
48282 Update Master Document
48288 menu or the toolbar.
48291 \begin_layout Standard
48292 More about formats and their options is described in the section
48303 \begin_layout Standard
48304 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
48306 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
48307 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
48308 This is done by specifying a
48313 More about this is described in the section
48324 \begin_layout Chapter
48325 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48327 \begin_inset Index idx
48330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48337 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48339 name "chap:Units-available-in"
48346 \begin_layout Standard
48348 \begin_inset space ~
48352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48354 reference "tab:Units"
48358 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48359 and used in this documentation.
48362 \begin_layout Standard
48363 \begin_inset Float table
48369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48370 \begin_inset Caption Standard
48372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48373 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48388 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48396 \begin_inset Tabular
48397 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
48398 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
48399 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48400 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
48401 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48447 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48451 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48484 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48488 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48550 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48554 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
48558 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48715 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48719 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48752 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48756 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48789 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48793 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48825 scaled point (65536
48826 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48830 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48893 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
48898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49017 % of original image width
49022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49106 \begin_layout Standard
49107 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
49110 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
49117 \begin_layout Bibliography
49118 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49119 LatexCommand bibitem
49126 The \SpecialChar LyX
49128 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49131 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
49137 \begin_inset Newline newline
49141 \begin_inset Flex URL
49144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49146 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
49154 \begin_layout Bibliography
49155 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49156 LatexCommand bibitem
49157 key "latexcompanion"
49162 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
49164 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49165 Companion Second Edition.
49168 Addison-Wesley, 2004
49171 \begin_layout Bibliography
49172 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49173 LatexCommand bibitem
49179 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
49182 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
49186 Addison-Wesley, 2003
49189 \begin_layout Bibliography
49190 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49191 LatexCommand bibitem
49200 : A Document Preparation System.
49203 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
49206 \begin_layout Bibliography
49207 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49208 LatexCommand bibitem
49218 The \SpecialChar TeX
49222 Addison-Wesley, 1984
49225 \begin_layout Bibliography
49226 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49227 LatexCommand bibitem
49233 The \SpecialChar TeX
49235 \begin_inset Newline newline
49239 \begin_inset Flex URL
49242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49244 http://texcatalogue.ctan.org/bytopic.html
49252 \begin_layout Bibliography
49253 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49254 LatexCommand bibitem
49260 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49262 \begin_inset Newline newline
49266 \begin_inset Flex URL
49269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49271 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
49279 \begin_layout Bibliography
49280 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49281 LatexCommand bibitem
49288 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49290 name "Documentation"
49291 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
49298 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49302 \begin_inset Newline newline
49306 \begin_inset Flex URL
49309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49311 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
49319 \begin_layout Bibliography
49320 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49321 LatexCommand bibitem
49328 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49330 name "Documentation"
49331 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
49336 how to use the program
49338 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49342 \begin_inset Newline newline
49346 \begin_inset Flex URL
49349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49351 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
49359 \begin_layout Bibliography
49360 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49361 LatexCommand bibitem
49368 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49370 name "Documentation"
49371 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
49376 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49382 \begin_inset Index idx
49385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49387 packages ! biblatex
49393 \begin_inset Newline newline
49397 \begin_inset Flex URL
49400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49402 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
49410 \begin_layout Bibliography
49411 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49412 LatexCommand bibitem
49419 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49421 name "Documentation"
49422 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
49427 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49433 \begin_inset Index idx
49436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49444 \begin_inset Newline newline
49448 \begin_inset Flex URL
49451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49453 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
49461 \begin_layout Bibliography
49462 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49463 LatexCommand bibitem
49470 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49472 name "Documentation"
49473 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
49483 \begin_inset Newline newline
49487 \begin_inset Flex URL
49490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49492 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
49500 \begin_layout Bibliography
49501 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49502 LatexCommand bibitem
49503 key "makeindex-man"
49509 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49512 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
49522 \begin_inset Newline newline
49526 \begin_inset Flex URL
49529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49531 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
49539 \begin_layout Bibliography
49540 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49541 LatexCommand bibitem
49548 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49550 name "Documentation"
49551 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
49561 \begin_inset Newline newline
49565 \begin_inset Flex URL
49568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49570 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
49578 \begin_layout Bibliography
49579 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49580 LatexCommand bibitem
49587 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49589 name "Documentation"
49590 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
49595 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
49597 \begin_inset Newline newline
49601 \begin_inset Flex URL
49604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49606 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
49614 \begin_layout Bibliography
49615 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49616 LatexCommand bibitem
49623 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49625 name "Documentation"
49626 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
49631 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49637 \begin_inset Index idx
49640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49648 \begin_inset Newline newline
49652 \begin_inset Flex URL
49655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49657 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
49665 \begin_layout Bibliography
49666 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49667 LatexCommand bibitem
49674 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49676 name "Documentation"
49677 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
49682 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49688 \begin_inset Index idx
49691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49693 packages ! enumitem
49699 \begin_inset Newline newline
49703 \begin_inset Flex URL
49706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49708 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
49716 \begin_layout Bibliography
49717 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49718 LatexCommand bibitem
49725 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49727 name "Documentation"
49728 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
49733 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49739 \begin_inset Index idx
49742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49744 packages ! fancyhdr
49750 \begin_inset Newline newline
49754 \begin_inset Flex URL
49757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49759 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
49767 \begin_layout Bibliography
49768 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49769 LatexCommand bibitem
49776 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49778 name "Documentation"
49779 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
49784 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49790 \begin_inset Index idx
49793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49795 packages ! hyperref
49801 \begin_inset Newline newline
49805 \begin_inset Flex URL
49808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49810 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
49818 \begin_layout Bibliography
49819 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49820 LatexCommand bibitem
49827 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49829 name "Documentation"
49830 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
49835 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49841 \begin_inset Index idx
49844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49846 packages ! microtpye
49852 \begin_inset Newline newline
49856 \begin_inset Flex URL
49859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49861 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
49869 \begin_layout Bibliography
49870 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49871 LatexCommand bibitem
49878 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49880 name "Documentation"
49881 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
49886 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49892 \begin_inset Index idx
49895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49903 \begin_inset Newline newline
49907 \begin_inset Flex URL
49910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49912 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
49920 \begin_layout Bibliography
49921 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49922 LatexCommand bibitem
49929 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49931 name "Documentation"
49932 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
49937 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49943 \begin_inset Index idx
49946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49948 packages ! prettyref
49954 \begin_inset Newline newline
49958 \begin_inset Flex URL
49961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49963 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
49971 \begin_layout Bibliography
49972 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49973 LatexCommand bibitem
49980 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49982 name "Documentation"
49983 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
49988 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49994 \begin_inset Index idx
49997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49999 packages ! refstyle
50005 \begin_inset Newline newline
50009 \begin_inset Flex URL
50012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50014 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
50022 \begin_layout Bibliography
50023 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50024 LatexCommand bibitem
50031 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50034 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
50039 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50041 \begin_inset Newline newline
50045 \begin_inset Flex URL
50048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50050 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
50058 \begin_layout Bibliography
50059 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50060 LatexCommand bibitem
50067 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50070 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
50075 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50077 \begin_inset Newline newline
50081 \begin_inset Flex URL
50084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50086 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
50094 \begin_layout Bibliography
50095 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50096 LatexCommand bibitem
50103 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50106 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
50111 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50112 for Cyrillic languages:
50113 \begin_inset Newline newline
50117 \begin_inset Flex URL
50120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50122 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
50130 \begin_layout Bibliography
50131 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50132 LatexCommand bibitem
50139 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50142 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
50147 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50149 \begin_inset Newline newline
50153 \begin_inset Flex URL
50156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50158 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
50166 \begin_layout Bibliography
50167 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50168 LatexCommand bibitem
50175 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50178 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
50183 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50185 \begin_inset Newline newline
50189 \begin_inset Flex URL
50192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50194 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
50202 \begin_layout Bibliography
50203 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50204 LatexCommand bibitem
50211 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50214 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
50219 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50221 \begin_inset Newline newline
50225 \begin_inset Flex URL
50228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50230 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
50238 \begin_layout Standard
50239 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50273 \begin_inset Note Note
50276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50283 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
50284 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
50285 bibliography is the second one:
50293 \begin_layout Standard
50294 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
50295 LatexCommand bibtex
50296 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
50297 options "biblio/alphadin"
50304 \begin_layout Standard
50305 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50309 \begin_layout Standard
50313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50319 pagedeclaration}[1]{
50322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50328 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
50336 \begin_inset Note Note
50339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50340 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
50341 \begin_inset space ~
50345 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50347 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
50359 \begin_layout Standard
50360 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
50361 LatexCommand printnomenclature
50367 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
50368 LatexCommand printindex